JP7177532B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of providing game benefits (prize balls, prize medals, value data, etc.) according to game results.

Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-116898 A

However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document does not display specific information calculated by collecting game information generated in a game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying specific information calculated by collecting game information generated in a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention comprises game control means for controlling the progress of a game, and the game control means sets a set value that determines the probability of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. setting change means for controlling to a possible setting change state; information calculation means for collecting game information generated in a game in a predetermined game section and calculating specific information; and an information display unit for displaying the specific information and predetermined identification information. and information display means for displaying side by side in the game information, the game information includes the number of game media used in the game, the information calculation means does not calculate the specific information during the setting change state, and the The information display means displays the specific information in the past game section and the past game section when the display switching time elapses after displaying the specific information in the current game section and the identification information indicating the current game section . When displaying the identification information and displaying the specific information in the current game section, before the number of game media used in the game in the current game section reaches a predetermined number, the specific information in the current game section is displayed in the second display mode, the identification information indicating the current game section is displayed in the first display mode, and after reaching the predetermined number, the specific information in the current game section and the current game section The identification information indicating the is displayed in the second display mode, the specific information in the current game section is displayed in the second display mode , and the identification information indicating the current game section is displayed in the first display mode is displayed, if the number of game media used in the current game section reaches a predetermined number, the specific information in the current game section is displayed in the second display mode until the display switching time elapses. , the identification information indicating the current game section is displayed in the first display mode, and when the timing for displaying the specific information in the current game section comes next, the specific information in the current game section and The identification information indicating the current game section is displayed in the second display mode .

According to the present invention, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of the lower part of a glass frame. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller; FIG. It is a perspective view showing the positional relationship of various elements that constitute the main controller. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the memory map of a main-control part. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a dump list of a memory area in the main control unit; It is a figure which shows the relationship of the area|region for games in a main-control part, and an area|region for information. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special winning opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the various storage areas of the work area for games. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initialization trigger of the main RAM and the initialization area; It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special design stop processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the operation error determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a game ball counting process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance information calculation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example 1 of an information display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example 2 of the information display; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example 3 of an information display; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example 4 of an information display; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing display example 5 of an information display; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example 6 of an information display; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing display example 7 of an information display; It is a figure which shows the main process of a payout control part. It is a diagram showing a timer interrupt process of the payout control unit. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main process of a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the main process of an integrated control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit and V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit; It is a figure which shows the adjustment mode switching process of an integrated control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changeover switches and an adjustment mode selection table; It is a figure which shows the circuit structure centering on an audio|voice control part. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration of audio channels of an audio control unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a voice management table stored in a voice ROM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the sound volume adjustment process of a general control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case volume adjustment is performed during a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case volume adjustment is performed during fluctuation|variation production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example (operation example) when setting is changed; It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of production|presentation) in case setting change is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example (operation example) when RWM clear is performed; It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of production|presentation) in case RWM clear is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) in case the control state of a game is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of production|presentation) in case the control state of a game is restored. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example (operation example) when setting confirmation is performed; It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of production|presentation) in case setting confirmation is performed.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Also, FIG. 2 is an example of a partial perspective view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. Also, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) as game values flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 made up of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 (to be described later) are dispensed based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions. an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper plate 11 and flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later; A shooting operation device 13 is provided which can be operated to shoot the ball.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and produce sound (music, voice) effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like. It's like A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 is also provided with a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs such that game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (Fig. 1 or 2) function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a normal state and a normal state of the production button 17. Button drive motor 17b for changing to a protruding state located above, button vibration motor 17c (operating part) for changing the production button 17 to a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, and A button light emitting LED 17d (light emitting part) is provided for changing the effect button 17 between an extinguished state and a light emitting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, and the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. .

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 6) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining money stored in the storage medium and lends the game balls. When the return button 20b of the rental operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 6) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower tray 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a. During this time, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 6) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 6) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 (see FIG. 6) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3 and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 6) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 6) for driving the shooting member, and a shooting device that tilts upward from the shooting member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping a game ball are provided at a launch position that is the inclined lower end of the launch rail. When the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 6) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of the game ball into the inside. The left game area is divided into a left game area where the shot game balls flow down and a right game area where the game balls shot with a second projectile force stronger than the first projectile flow. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 , and the warp device 41 moves the interior of the decorative frame 40 below the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow downward.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win a prize (enter a ball) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game One general winning hole 43 in which a ball can always win a prize (enter a ball) is provided. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6) (granting conditions are satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. The payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (giving game value).

Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (first special symbol starting winning region) in which the game ball can always win (entering the ball). When the played game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 6) (granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is designed to be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (given game value). In addition, the right for performing a special game determination (jackpot determination) of whether or not to execute a special game (here, jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and obliquely below the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a win is won in the hit determination described later). A variable starter 46 is provided which can be converted from a difficult closed state to an easy open state or a game ball winning state.

The variable starting portion 46 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to serve as a flow path for game balls, and a movable member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a movable member 48 directly below the movable member 48. The second start opening 47 (start winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward, and the second start opening detection switch 47a (FIG. 6 ), and by moving the movable member 48 forward (winning control position), the second opening 47 is closed, and the movable member 48 is moved backward (winning position). A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 to the open state.

Then, a game ball enters the second starting port 47 that is in an open state during the auxiliary game described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6) (granting conditions are met). ), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given game value). In addition, a right for performing a special game determination whether or not to execute a special game (here a jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information described later is stored).

In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, there is provided a normal figure gate 44 (normal figure starting area) through which game balls can always pass. When the game ball that has passed through the normal figure gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, the prize ball is not awarded, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game. Granted (stored general pattern determination information, which will be described later).

Downstream of the general pattern gate 44, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a jackpot in a special game determination), a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize (entering a ball) is possible or easily opened. A first variable winning section 49 that can be converted to a state is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to form a flow path for game balls, and a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction. A first big prize winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, and a first big winning prize that detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning opening. By moving the opening detection switch 50a and the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (the winning regulation position), the first large winning opening 50 is closed and the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 is opened. A first big prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the first big winning opening 50 to the open state by moving backward (to the winning allowable position).

When the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves from the winning regulating position to the winning possible position during the jackpot game, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 is changed to the open state, and the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 is opened. The game balls that have flowed down or the game balls that have reached the first big winning hole 50 win the first big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加Then, when the game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 50 is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a (granting condition is established), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out. A device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (giving game value).

Downstream of the first variable winning part 49, it is possible or easy to win a prize (entering a ball) from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a jackpot in a special game determination). A second variable winning section 52 is provided which can be converted to an open state.

The second variable winning portion 52 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the drawing) to form a flow path for game balls, and a second large winning opening opening/closing member 54 that can move in the front-rear direction. A second big winning opening 53 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second big winning opening opening/closing member 54, and a second big winning opening that detects a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening. By moving the opening detection switch 53a and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 54 forward (the winning regulation position), the second large winning opening 53 is closed and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 54 is opened. A second big prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the second big winning opening 53 to the open state by moving backward (to the prize winning position).

Then, when the second large winning opening opening/closing member 54 moves from the winning regulation position to the winning allowing position during the jackpot game, the second large winning opening opening/closing member 53 is changed to the open state, and the upper surface of the second large winning opening opening/closing member 54 is opened. The game ball that has flowed down or the game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 53 wins the second big winning hole 53.例文帳に追加Then, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 53 is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

The game ball shot into the left game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage section 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. Winning any of the three general prize winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or flowing into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning port 43, the normal gate 44, the first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50) and the second variable winning portion 52 (second big winning port 53) provided in the right game area ( pass).

In addition, the game balls launched into the right game area are the general winning port 43, the normal gate 44, the variable starting portion 46 (second starting port 47), the first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50), Either the second variable prize winning portion 52 (the second big prize winning port 53 ) is won, or it flows into the out port 39 . Therefore, there is no chance of winning the general prize winning opening 43 and the first start opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 53, and the out opening 39 An out-ball flow path is provided for receiving and gathering out-balls made up of inflowing game balls to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 57a (see FIG. 6) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. A game ball flowing down this out-ball flow path and detected by the out-ball detection switch 57a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61 and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63 and a second special symbol reservation device. A holding display device consisting of a display device 64 and a normal symbol holding display device 65, a round number display device 66 for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, and a jackpot game (special game) described later ) A right-handed indicator 67 is provided for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area during the middle or high probability game state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is used to display (notify) the result of the special game determination (first special symbol jackpot determination) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 (entering the ball). A variable display device, the second special symbol display device 61 displays the result of the special game determination (second special symbol jackpot determination) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 (entering the ball). It is a variable display for (notifying), and the normal symbol display 62 is the result of the auxiliary game determination (normal symbol hit determination) performed based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44 It is a variable indicator for displaying (notifying).

Special game determination means that special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, reach determination Random number, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when the special game determination is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is indicated after the lapse of a predetermined time. (Notify) Stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Further, when the special game determination is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display device 61 performs the variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is indicated after the lapse of a predetermined time. A stop display of the second special symbol (notifying) is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, small hit mode, losing mode) showing the result of the special game determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" refers to a state in which execution of a jackpot game (special game) is determined in the special game determination. The "jackpot game" is a round game in which the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 53) are changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined number of times ( For example, 2 times, 16 times, etc.) is a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50, second big winning mouth 53) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) enter the big winning hole, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Also, "small hit" means a state in which it is determined to execute a small hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The ``small winning game'' means that a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 53) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a more disadvantageous manner than the big winning game can easily win prize balls. A game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, although the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in the small winning game is predetermined, even before the maximum opening time is reached, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win the big winning opening ), the small winning game ends. In addition, unlike the jackpot game, the game state is not changed based on (due to) the execution of the small hit game.

Auxiliary game determination is based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 (entrance ball), normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained general pattern determination information. It should be noted that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 is normally varied and displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbol stop display indicating (notifying) the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. And, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) showing the result of the auxiliary game determination.

It should be noted that the term "hit" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which it is determined that an auxiliary game (hitting game) is to be executed in the auxiliary game determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win a prize (entering a ball), the auxiliary game (hitting game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbols are likely to be satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (hitting games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the number of special symbol determination information (first special symbol reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 It is for displaying the number of the first special figure reservation, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the first special figure reservation. In addition, the first special figure reservation is stored up to four, but it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the number of special symbol determination information (second special symbol reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47 It is for displaying the number of second special figure reservations, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second special figure reservations. In addition, although the second special figure reservation is stored up to 4 at maximum, it may be less than 4 or may be more, and even if the second special figure reservation is not stored good.

The normal pattern reservation display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of normal pattern determination information (normal pattern reservation) stored when the game ball wins (passes) in the normal pattern gate 44. It lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal map reservations. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of normal pattern reservations is stored up to 4, it may be less than or greater than 4, and the normal pattern reservations may not be stored.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery with a special symbol, "3" or "7" is displayed in a stopped state, and when it is lost, a "-" is displayed in a stopped state. It is preferable to repeat turning off and "-".

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display formed smaller in size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable effect device 73 for executing the action effect is provided, and a variation notification LED 59 for notifying the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol is provided in the right part of the effect space 40a.

In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effects are displayed according to the progress of the game. The effect display includes a customer waiting effect performed while the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbols 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and a jackpot game during execution. There are jackpot performances etc.

In addition, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., while the first image display device 70 is executing a variable effect. It has become.

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located near the end (below) of the first image display device 70 and the rendering position (second position) located near the center (above) of the first image display device 70 position) and move (up, down) in the vertical direction to perform a movement effect. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 .

In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a variable display area for displaying three production patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and execution of variable production A mode display area or the like indicating the production mode related to is formed.

The production pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "8", for example. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbols, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols. As the effect pattern 70a, patterns representing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be used.

In the stop display of the performance symbol 70a, the performance symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the special game determination (jackpot determination). The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777", and the losing mode is other modes.

The variable display mode of the effect pattern 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). good.

In addition, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display according to the result of the special game determination. The display on the device 71 heightens the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

In the first image display device 70, the first reserved icon display area 70C (first reserved area ), the second reserved icon display area 70D (second reserved area) for displaying the number of second reserved icons (second reserved display) corresponding to the second special figure reserved number (U2), special figure reserved An icon display area 70E (digestion pending area) or the like for displaying the icon (digestion pending display) indicating that the variable effect executed with the number subtracted is being executed is formed.

The first reserved icon display area 70C includes a first display section 70C1 (first area), a second display section 70C2 (second area), and a third display section 70C3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70E. , and the fourth display portion 70C4 (fourth area), and the first display portion 70C1 to the fourth display portion 70C4 have the number of first reservations corresponding to the number of first special figure reservations (U1) icon is displayed.

Specifically, the first display portion 70C1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70C2 displays the second In the third display portion 70C3, a first reserved icon indicating a first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70C3, the first special symbol in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. A first pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70C4 displays a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left, a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), a fourth display portion 70D4 ( 4th area), and the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special figure pending number (U2) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4.

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays the second In the third display portion 70D3, a second holding icon indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70D3, the second special symbol in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. A second pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70E is formed directly above the pedestal image to be clearly distinguished from the first reserved icon display area 70C and the second reserved icon display area 70D. The icon is displayed as follows.

Specifically, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70C along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) moves toward the icon display area 70E one by one. By moving (shifting), the first pending icon displayed in the first display unit 70C1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70E, and becomes the icon, and the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in a variable manner. The icon disappears (deletes) at the end of

Also, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the second suspended icon displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D moves one by one (shift ), and the second pending icon displayed in the first display unit 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70E to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 variably displays the performance symbols 70a, but the second image display device 71 may variably display the performance symbols, or Both the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may perform the variable display of the production pattern 70a.

The movable effect device 73 has an operable first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute an action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, so that it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is positioned at a standby position (first position) near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and at a center side (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It moves (rises and descends) between the presenting position (second position). The second movable member 73b moves between a waiting position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The variation notification LED 59 is composed of full-color LEDs, and is provided with a first variation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second variation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first variation notification LED 59a starts a change in color (variation display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the color corresponding to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the first special symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second variation notification LED 59b starts changing the color (variation display of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and changes the color in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the second special symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed.

In addition, the result of the variable display (special game determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol, and the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol You may make it alert|report the result of the fluctuation|variation display (special game range) of a 2nd special design by. In addition, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol (special game determination) is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol is varied and displayed (special game determination) only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. ) may be reported.

In addition, instead of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first variation notification LED 59a and the second variation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second special symbol. The two-image display device 71 may be used for variable display.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A game ball storage unit 96 that stores balls and supplies them to a payout device 95; A payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the payout device 95, and a production control device 130A incorporating a production control board 130 for controlling production in response to the production control command from the main control board 110. , a power supply device 160A that incorporates a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information for outputting game information (game signals) to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer). An output terminal plate 90 and the like are provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74). A selector switch 22 is provided for switching between adjustment modes related to the adjustment of the amount of light.

(Configuration of main controller)
Next, the configuration of the main controller 110A that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of main controller 110A.

The main controller 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110 inside, and a sealing seal for regulating the opening of the board case. 104 and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104 .

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for shifting to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting , and an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values, which will be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) each having a decimal point DP. . An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the 7-segment displays 113a and 113b, and the setting values and numerical values of the performance information are displayed by the 7-segment displays 113c and 113d. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information.

The substrate case includes a concave lower case member 101 whose portion facing the back side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave upper case member 102 whose portion facing the front side of the main control board 110 is open. A housing space for housing the main control board 110 is formed by closing the lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 .

At the end of the substrate case, the lower case member 101 and the lower case member 101 are provided. A sticking portion for sticking the sealing seal 104 across the upper case member 102 is provided.

The sealing portion is composed of a lower fixing portion 101a provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper fixing portion 102a provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower fixing portion 101a. Then, the board case is sealed by screwing a one-way screw whose rotation in the removal direction is restricted from the upper fixed portion 102a to the lower fixed portion 101a.

The sticking portion is composed of a lower sticking portion 101b provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper sticking portion 102b provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower sticking portion 101b. Then, the substrate case is sealed by sticking the sealing seal 104 across the lower sticking portion 101b and the upper sticking portion 102b.

The seal cover member 105 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with one side open. The sealing seal 104 is protected by attaching to the substrate case so as to enclose the pasting portion to which the sealing seal 104 is pasted.

On the upper surface of the upper case member 102, a model name sticker 106 printed with the model name (model name) of the game machine 1 and a control number sticker 107 printed with the control number of the main control board 110 are arranged side by side. affixed in the state At a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, an operation member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted. When the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

An insertion portion 112 for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. The insertion portion 112 has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a cylindrical portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. is doing. When the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the keyhole. When the setting key switch 112a is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off so that the setting key can be removed from the keyhole.

(Positional relationship of various elements)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the positional relationship of various elements forming main controller 110A will be described. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the positional relationship of various elements constituting main controller 110A.

The model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107 are arranged laterally in the vicinity of the center of the upper case member 102 in the lateral direction above a stepped portion formed in the lower portion of the upper case member 102 in the lateral direction. affixed as Therefore, it is possible to easily check the printed contents.

The main control unit 110m, which consists of a one-chip microcomputer, is located in the center of the upper side of the main control board 110, and is shifted upward so as not to overlap the model name sticker 106 and control number sticker 107. It is mounted with the printed surface on which the product name, etc. is printed facing upward. Therefore, the main control unit 110m is not restricted (shielded) from view by the model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107, and the printed surface can be easily checked from the upper side of the substrate case.

The information display 113 is mounted side by side on the upper right side of the main control board 110, shifted rightward and upward so as not to overlap the model name sticker 106 and control number sticker 107. It is Therefore, the information display device 113 is not restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107, and the displayed contents can be easily confirmed.

The sealing sticker 104 has a portion attached to the upper surface (surface) of the attached portion formed by the upper attached portion 102b closer to the main control board 110 (closer to the upper surface of the upper case member 102 than the model name sticker 106 and control number sticker 107). , and the upper surface of the information display 113), and the portion attached to the lower surface (bottom surface) of the attachment portion formed by the lower attachment portion 101b is positioned below the information display 113 (back side). is doing.

As the information display device 113, a performance display unit formed by unitizing a circuit section composed of four 7-segment displays and substrates may be mounted on the main control substrate. Even in such a case, it is desirable that the type name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107 be shifted so as not to overlap each other in the front and rear direction so that the visibility is not restricted (shielded).

Also, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on a dedicated board. It may be mounted and connected to the main control board 110 board-to-board so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110 .

In addition, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power board 160 if it is in a position where the player cannot operate it. It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4 . Even in this case, it is preferable to input the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a to the main controller 110m.

In addition, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored content of the main RAM 110c or updating the setting value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be located at a position where the player cannot operate. 160 , on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 , or on the back side of the glass frame 4 .

In addition, instead of displaying both the performance information and the setting values on the information display 113, another display is displayed on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110. The performance information may be displayed on one of the displays, and the setting values may be displayed on the other display.

(Overall block diagram of game machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the block diagram of the entire game machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. A board 120, an effect control board 130 for controlling a game-related effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board for supplying power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. 160 is provided.

In addition, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports. It has 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a first large Winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, second big winning hole detecting switch 53a, second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 54b, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a, second 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right hitting display 67, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and effect control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission and reception of various control commands. It performs control processing and the like for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, and a switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage portion 96 of the above.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like (not shown).
The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b, and launches the ball. When the detection signal from the volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing for audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing for various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (such as motors) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m. It has

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output ports of the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, various input devices (detection switch etc.) according to the detection signal from control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or outputs a predetermined sound to the audio output device 9. and control the output of sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. An image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and an audio output based on the reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141 An audio control unit 148 for controlling the device 9 and an audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like are provided.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input to which an image control unit 145 and an audio control unit 148 are connected. It has an output port.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9 to generate a sound control command for instructing the effect sound to be output, and perform control processing and the like for transmitting the command to the sound control unit 148 .

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a frame illumination device 10, a button drive motor 17b, and a button vibration motor. 17c, button emission LED 17d, and an input/output port.

Input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame illumination device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button emission LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, and the board illumination device 74.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. As a result, control processing of the frame illumination device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button emission LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, and the board illumination device 74 is performed.

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Effect control board 130 and various electronic components) (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It has a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 at the time of power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. In addition, even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control section 130m is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped when the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value during output.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. It is supplied to the sub-RAM 130c of the section 130m. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from the power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power failure (power failure). can be restored.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 so that the memory contents of the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). .

In addition, backup power is supplied to the effect control unit 130m, but if it is not necessary to retain the storage contents of the sub RAM 130c at the time of power failure (power failure), backup power is supplied to the effect control unit 130m. You may choose not to supply it.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability game state" and "high probability game state" as a state related to the special game determination (jackpot determination), the state related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 "non-time-saving game state” and “time-saving game state”. Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state" that is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state;
(2) a "low-probability short-time gaming state" that is a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state;
(3) A high-probability game state and a time-saving game state are provided.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as a "normal game state" in the present embodiment. In addition, the game state during the jackpot game is also set to the "low-probability non-time-saving game state", which is different from the normal game state.

Here, the "low-probability gaming state" means, for example, when the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the first start port 45 or the second start In the special game determination (jackpot determination) performed on the condition that a game ball enters the opening 47, it means a game state in which the winning probability of the jackpot is set as low as about 1/300.

On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" means that when the set value is "1", the winning probability of the jackpot is set as high as about 1/60. A game state that is advantageous to It should be noted that the transition from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the "non-time-saving game state" means that in the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal figure gate 44, the winning probability of the hit is set as low as 1/16. It refers to a game state in which the average time for the variable display of symbols is set to about 30 seconds and the open time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" means that the winning probability of winning is set as high as 15/16, the average time of variable display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and the number of times when winning is won. By setting the opening time of the second start port 47 to 5 seconds, it means a game state advantageous to the player in which the consumption of game balls is suppressed as compared with the non-time-saving game state. It should be noted that the shift from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state is performed after the end of the big winning game.

It should be noted that the average fluctuation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47 and the winning probability of winning lottery are set to be more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state". , the average variation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery may be set to be advantageous.

In addition, the winning probability of winning in the auxiliary game determination in the non-time-saving game state is the same without changing depending on the setting value, but it is changed according to the setting value so that the winning probability becomes more advantageous as the setting value increases. good too. In addition, the winning probability in the auxiliary game determination in the time-saving game state does not change depending on the setting value and is the same, but it is changed according to the setting value so that the winning probability becomes more advantageous as the setting value increases. good too.

(Memory map of main controller)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area composed of the main ROM 110b and the main RAM 110c of the main control section 110m.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b include a game ROM area (8000H to 9FFFH) for storing programs and data relating to the progress of the game, and an information ROM area (A000H for storing programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine). ~A52EH), an unused area of 16 bytes or more where access is prohibited and "0" is stored (A52FH~A6FFH), and a ROM comment area where data such as the program title and version are stored (A700H~) A77FH), a vector table area (A780H to A7A7H) in which the start address of timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, etc., is set, and a HW parameter area (A7A8H to A7FFFH) are arranged in order.

The game ROM area consists of a game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) in which programs relating to the progress of the game are stored, and a first unused area (8BDDH to 8FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ), a game data area (9000H to 9976H) in which data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and a second unused area (9977H to 9FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored in this order. are placed.

The information ROM area consists of an information program area (A000H to A437H) in which a program related to performance display of the gaming machine is stored, and an unused area (A438H to A47FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. , and information data areas (A480H to A52EH) in which data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c includes a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) used as a work (work area) when executing the game program, and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed. (0190H to 01FFH) are arranged in order.

The game RWM area includes a game work area (0000H to 0128H) used as a work by the game program, a first unused area (0129H to 0171H) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, A game stack area (0172H to 017FH) for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area (0180H to 018FH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ) are arranged in order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area (0190H to 01E8H) used as a work by the information program, an unused area (01E9H to 01EAH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and an information program. Information stack areas (01EBH to 01FFH) for temporarily saving data being processed are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

(RWM area dump list)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a dump list when the contents of the memory area of the main control unit 110m are output to a printer or display. In FIG. 8, a plurality of areas surrounded by squares are unused areas in which "0" is stored.

In the game RWM area, an unused area storing "0" is set over 73 bytes or more between the game work area (0000H to 0128H) and the game stack area (0172H to 017FH). . Therefore, the unused area forms a boundary line that separates the game work area and the game stack area. Identification (recognition) becomes possible.

In the information RWM area, a two-byte unused area in which "0" is stored is set between the information work area (0190H to 01E8H) and the information stack area (01EBH to 01FFH). Therefore, the unused area forms a boundary separating the information work area and the information stack area, so that the information work area and the information stack area can be easily identified in debugging and inspection of the gaming machine 1. (recognition) becomes possible.

In addition, after the game stack area (0172H to 017FH), an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 16 bytes from 0180H, which is a multiple of 16, and after this unused area, an information work area ( 0190H to 01E8H) are set from 0190H, which is a multiple of 16. Therefore, the unused area forms a boundary line that separates the game RWM area and the information RWM area. Identification (recognition) becomes possible.

In the game ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 1059 bytes between the game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) and the game data area (9000H to 9976H). Therefore, a boundary line separating the game program area and the game data area is formed by the unused area. Identification (recognition) becomes possible.

In the information ROM area, a 72-byte unused area in which "0" is stored is set between the information program area (A000H to A437H) and the information data area (A480H to A52EH). Therefore, the unused area forms a boundary separating the information program area and the information data area, so that the information program area and the information data area can be easily identified in debugging and inspection of the gaming machine 1. (recognition) becomes possible.

After the game data area (9000H to 9976H), an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 1673 bytes. is set. Therefore, a boundary line separating the game ROM area and the information ROM area is formed by the unused area. Identification (recognition) becomes possible.

In addition, in the game ROM area and the information ROM area, an unused area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the program area and the data area. It is not necessary to provide an unused area between the data area and the data area.

Also, although an unused area is provided at the end of the game ROM area, this unused area is not provided in the game ROM area, but at the beginning of the information ROM area (before the information program area). An unused area may be provided, or between the game ROM area and the information ROM area (between the game data area and the information program area) so as not to belong to the game ROM area and the information ROM area. may be provided with unused areas.

Further, in the game RWM area and the information RWM area, an unused area of predetermined bytes is provided between the work area and the stack area. It is also possible that no unused area is provided between the data area and the stack area.

Also, although an unused area is provided at the end of the game RWM area, this unused area is not provided in the game RWM area, but at the beginning of the information RWM area (before the information work area). An unused area may be provided, or between the game RWM area and the information RWM area (between the game stack area and the information work area) so as not to belong to the game RWM area and the information RWM area. may be provided with unused areas.

(Relationship between game area and information area)
FIG. 9 shows a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program, and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program. It is a figure which shows the relationship with.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the main CPU 110a basically refers to the game data area and uses the game RWM area as a work when performing processing based on the game program. The contents of the RWM area are referenced and updated. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9(b), when performing the processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called and the information A process based on the program is executed, and the flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the information program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG.

(jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 10(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol referred to in the special game determination (jackpot determination) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 (entrance ball). 10(b) is a second special symbol jackpot determination table referred to in the special game determination (jackpot determination) performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47 (entering the ball).

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the first special symbol jackpot determination table includes the current setting value, the probability game state when the jackpot determination is performed, the random number for jackpot determination, and the determination of the jackpot determination. Results (big win, small win, loss) are associated with each other, and for reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of "big win" or "small win" is described in the rightmost column.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the second special symbol jackpot determination table contains the current setting value, the probability game state when the jackpot determination is performed, the jackpot determination random number, and the jackpot determination. is associated with the judgment result (big hit, lose), and for reference, the approximate probability of "big hit" or "small hit" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10A or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the state and the random number value for judging the big win, it is judged whether it is a "big win", a "small win", or a "losing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. The random number for judging a big hit is judged to be a "big hit", and in the high-probability gaming state, 1000 random numbers for judging a big hit from "100" to "1099" are judged to be a "big hit". In addition, 200 large-hit determination random numbers of "2000" to "2199" are determined to be "small hits" regardless of whether they are in the low-probability gaming state or in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, a random value for judging a big win other than judging a big win or a small win is judged to be "losing".

As a feature of the big win determination table for special symbols shown in FIG. 10, the big win probability changes depending on the setting value, but the small win probability does not change and is constant. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

It should be noted that the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value), but it is determined as a jackpot The probability of receiving is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

In addition, although no small hit is set in the second special symbol jackpot determination table, the small hit may be set so as to have the same probability as the first special symbol jackpot determination table, A small hit may be set so as to have a probability different from that of the big hit determination table for the first special symbol.

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous it is to the player (the higher the probability of a big hit). can be

In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values ( 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and/or the high probability game state may be the same.

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special symbol determination table for a big hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 11(b) is a special symbol determination table when it is determined as a losing It is a special symbol determination table for losing which is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the symbol, and FIG. It is a special symbol determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) to 11(c), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random number for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination. The stop special figure data which shows the result and the special design designation command which shows the decision result of special design decision are matched.

Special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols for executing the first jackpot game in which 16 round games are executed, and special symbols "02" and "05" are 16 round games. It is a big win special symbol for executing a second big winning game in which a game is executed, and "03" is a big winning special symbol for executing a third big winning game in which two round games are executed. In addition, the special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. Also, the special symbol "20" is a small winning special symbol in which a small winning game is executed.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 11(a) to 11(c), and selects a special symbol based on the special symbol type for determining the stop symbol and the special symbol determination random number value. The type, the stop special figure data and the special symbol specification command are determined, and the special symbol specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the types of big winning special symbols, types of losing special symbols, and types of small winning special symbols are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, at least one of the special jackpot pattern and the special jackpot pattern may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols, the selection ratio of various losing symbols, and the selection ratio of various small winning symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. is mentioned. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 12 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 13 is a determination of the special symbol variation pattern in the time-saving gaming state. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving gaming state that is referred to when.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, in each special figure variation pattern determination table, the type of special symbol to perform the variation display, the determination result of the big hit determination, the determination result of the special symbol (stop special figure data), Random number for reach determination, 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or 2nd special figure reservation number (U2), random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special design The fluctuation time and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify at least the type of special symbol, the determination result of the big hit determination, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss, the random number for the reach judgment is referred, but in the case of the big hit, the reach occurs except in special cases, so the random number for the reach judgment is not referred. It is

In addition, in the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost, the special figure reservation number (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) increases , The variation pattern is determined so that the variation time of the special symbol is shortened.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or 13, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the determination result of the special symbol (stop special figure data), the reach determination random number, and the first special figure reservation. Based on the number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure variation pattern, the special symbol variation time and the special figure variation pattern designation command are determined, and the special figure A variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, in the production control board 130, as will be described later, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation pattern designation command), since it is designed to determine the contents of the fluctuation production (production mode), FIG. 12 and FIG. In the rightmost column of each special figure pattern determination table shown in , the contents of the production that can be executed in the variable production are described as a reference.

"Normal fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", "long fluctuation", and "ultra-shortening fluctuation" are shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. It means that it fluctuates and stops without becoming a reach, normal fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than long fluctuation, shortening fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than normal fluctuation, The ultra-shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the shortened variation.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for reporting a big win, the same performance symbols 70a are set to "7" in the left and right areas. is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach in which the same production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one production pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the reach with the lowest expectation of a big win. It has become. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not cause a big win, but the "normal reach" may be configured to cause a big win.

Also, "SP reach" is a super reach that is performed after the normal reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach. For example, there is a special effect that makes the player expect that the three performance symbols 70a will be reduced and moved to the corner of the image display device, and that the jackpot game will be executed using almost the entire display area of the image display device. It is supposed to be done.

Also, "SPSP reach" is a special reach that is performed after super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than super reach. For example, the three production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to produce a more special production than "SP reach".

In addition, the “full rotation reach” is a reach that will determine the jackpot. For example, all the three production patterns 70a are the same and fluctuate at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special production than "SPSP reach".

In addition, the “chance performance” is a performance that arouses whether a big win or a small win will occur. For example, although the three performance symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corner of the image display device, they do not reach the reach state, and a special performance is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

As the first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the special figure variation pattern is determined in the time saving gaming state than the special figure variation pattern is determined in the non-time saving gaming state One of the points is that it is easier to determine a relatively short fluctuation time (the average fluctuation time becomes shorter). Therefore, it is possible to change the variation time of the special symbol between the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the type of the special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

It should be noted that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern may be changed for each set value, may be changed by odd setting and even setting, low setting (eg 1 to 2) is or high setting (eg, 3 to 4). In addition, a dedicated special figure variation pattern is provided for each set value, a dedicated special figure variation pattern is provided for one of the odd setting and even setting, and the other is not provided with a special special figure variation pattern, One of the low setting and high setting may be provided with a dedicated special figure variation pattern, and the other may not be provided with a dedicated special figure variation pattern.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 14(a) is the first to be referred to in the preliminary determination to determine the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It is a preliminary determination table for special symbols, and FIG. 14B shows special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 before the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is a figure which shows the prior determination table for 2nd special designs referred in the prior determination to determine.

As shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b), the preliminary determination table includes a game state, a determination result of jackpot determination, a random number for special symbol determination, a random number for reach determination, and a special figure. A random value for variation pattern determination, a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and a start opening winning designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

In the pre-judgment of the special figure judgment information, it is possible to judge whether it is a "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" by the random number for judging the big hit, and the type of special design can be judged by the random number for judging the special design. , Since it is possible to determine in advance the type of special figure scheduled variation pattern to be executed by the random value for reach determination and the random value for special figure variation pattern determination, whether it is a big hit or a small hit from the starting entrance winning prize designation command No, it is possible to specify the type of special symbol and the special symbol scheduled variation pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 14(a) or FIG. 14(b), and determines the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for judging the special symbol, the random number for judging the reach, and the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern. Based on the numerical value, the special figure scheduled variation pattern and the starting opening winning designation command are determined, and the starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Large winning mouth opening mode determination table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a big winning hole opening state determination table for changing the state of the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 53 in the big winning game.

As shown in FIG. 15, the big winning hole opening state determination table includes stop special figure data of special symbols, the type of big winning hole to be opened, the maximum number of round games in the big winning game, and the big winning hole in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the maximum number of openings of the big prize mouth in each round game, and the opening of each round game once The opening time of the big winning opening, the closing interval time for closing the big winning opening after the end of the round game, and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the big winning game are associated with each other.

When the stop special figure data is "01", the main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game, and when the stop special figure data is "02", the main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game which is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game when the stop special figure data is "02". When the second big win game is executed and the stop special figure data is "03", the third big win game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second big win game is executed.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends. In the game state setting table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time saving game flag indicating the time saving game state, and the time saving game state executable The time saving number of times (J) indicating the number of times of fluctuation display, the high probability game flag indicating that it is in the high probability game state, and the high probability number of times (X) indicating the number of times of fluctuation display that can be executed in the high probability game state are mapped.

Here, the "state data at the time of winning" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state is composed of a combination of a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, a low-probability game state, and a high-probability game state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data, the time saving game flag, the number of times of time saving (J), the high probability game flag, and the high probability game flag. A probability number (X) is determined.

In addition, when the high probability game state is set, 50000 times may be set as the high probability number of times (X). Since the next jackpot winning is substantially decided, the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game are jackpot games in which the next jackpot game is decided.

As the first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, even if the same stop special figure data (J) may be different.

Specifically, in the case of the stop special figure data 01 (special symbol 01), "00H" indicating a low-probability non-time-saving game state is stored as state data at the time of winning with respect to the time-saving game flag and the number of time-saving games (J). If so, the time saving game flag is not set at the end of the jackpot game, and the number of time saving times (J) is set to 0 times. On the other hand, if "01H" indicating a low-probability short-time gaming state or "02H" indicating a high-probability short-time gaming state is stored as state data at the time of winning, a time-saving game flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. , set the number of times of time saving (J) to 100 times. As a result, the number of time reduction times (J) can be changed according to the game state when the big win is won, and the player can be interested in the game state when the big win is won.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that the types of the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag to be set are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Various storage areas in game work area)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the game work area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17(a) stores the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (enters) in the first start port 45 and/or the second start port 47. FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing a determination information storage area, FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit in the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a general pattern determination information storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45. First special figure determination information holding storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area for storing special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70C1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70C. They correspond to the portion 70C2, the third display portion 70C3, and the fourth display portion 70C4, respectively. Also, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area are the first display unit 70D1, the second display unit 70D2 of the second holding icon display area 70D, They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area is the first special figure reservation number (U1), and these special figure determination A number of first pending icons corresponding to the information are displayed in the first display portion 70C1 to the fourth display portion 70C4 of the first pending icon display area 70C. In addition, the number of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information is the second special figure reservation number (U2), corresponding to these determination information A number of suspended icons are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second suspended icon display area 70D.

Moreover, the 0th memory|storage part which is a special figure determination information execution memory|storage area corresponds to the said icon display area 70E. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70E.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball wins (entrance) to the first start port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in a storage unit with a small number. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest number in which the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is a special figure determination information execution storage area, is a special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. will be referenced to execute the

As shown in FIG. 17(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is a normal pattern determination information storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a general pattern determination information storage area in which the general pattern determination information being displayed is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. In addition, the number of general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information reservation storage area is the number of general pattern determination information.

As shown in FIG. 17(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for storing the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. Normal figure determination information is stored.

The 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. It will be referred to for executing the variable display of normal symbols.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart. It should be noted that, in the following description, processing that is not specified as processing based on the information program is assumed to be processing based on the game program.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and initialization of a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on setting confirmation operation, etc. are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later, and a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up in a predetermined area of the game RWM area (power supply is restored), and in step S62 prohibits RWM access. , and then wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

In the event of a power failure (complete power failure), the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program and saved in the game RWM area. may be calculated and saved in the RWM area for information.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S18 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, one checksum (abnormality determination data) is calculated without distinguishing between the game RWM area and the information RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a, the RWM clear switch 111a, and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the game control state is initialized (for game processing for initializing areas other than the set value area in the RWM area). Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the game RWM area. If there is no setting change flag, it is determined that the previous power interruption did not occur during setting change processing, and the process proceeds to step S23. The process proceeds to step S22 assuming that the error has occurred during the process. It should be noted that the setting changing flag is saved in the game RWM area in the setting changing process to be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information indicating a non-recoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting a non-recoverable error designation command indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130, timer allocation After clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the power supply Perform processing to wait until the supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change settings ”), the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board are all illuminated in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the audio output device 9 is displayed. An unrecoverable error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S24 assuming that the RWM clear mode is entered, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the production control board 130 . As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

"Power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "123") is displayed on the image display device when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been turned on is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S27 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S28.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S27. Specifically, a process for displaying the setting values saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 is performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power failure, and a predetermined power restoration screen (image) indicating that the power has been restored on the image display device Display for a period (for example, 30 seconds), or fully light the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74 with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or use voice The output device 9 outputs a power recovery notification sound (buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S30. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S31, permits all interrupts in step S32, and terminates this initial setting process. .

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if there is a setting change flag, that is, if the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, even if the checksum is normal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game in a state in which the setting value not intended by the gaming parlor side is set, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation include the ON state of the open detection switch 31a. good.

Also, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S20, unrecoverable error processing will be performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. At the same time, the information RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the information program, and the process may be moved to step S25.

Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in the subsequent step S20, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. Alternatively, the information RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the information program, and the process may proceed to step S25.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum may be calculated by the information program. . In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of all RWM areas is calculated, but the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area are calculated separately. , or any one of the checksums is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing.

Also, although the RWM area is determined to be abnormal based on the checksum of the RWM area, the RWM area is determined to be abnormal based on the RWM parity adjustment data calculated so that the exclusive OR of the RWM area becomes 0. You may do so.

In addition, by not determining whether or not there is a setting change flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a saves a setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the game RWM area. Note that whether or not there is a setting change flag is referred to in step S21 of the initial setting process described above.

In step S19-2, output of a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is started. As a result, a process for receiving a setting change signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, etc.).

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

"Notification of setting change" refers to displaying a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the image display device, or displaying a predetermined change of the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74 during the setting change. to light up all of them in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area (determination information area, game data area, etc.) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before power-off is not taken over. Specifically, the progress control of the game is started from the low-probability short-time gaming state.

At step 19-5, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after prohibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling a predetermined information program by a CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S19-6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S19-7, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S19-8. to move.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the error information area (other than the performance information area) of the RWM area for information. As a result, the error determination state is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the error determination state before power-off is not taken over. Specifically, progress control of the game is started assuming that no error has occurred.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) all areas (performance information area, error information area) of the RWM area for information. As a result, the data for calculating the performance information of the game machine 1 and the error determination state are initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the RWM area for information before the power is turned off. data will not be carried over. Specifically, the progress control of the game is started assuming that there is no game history.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is within the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S19-12, and the set value is not within the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). If so, in step S19-11, the set value is set to the initial value "1". It should be noted that, at this point, only provisional setting values are set, and the initial values of the setting values are not saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-12. Specifically, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating a set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, the game clerk can confirm the setting value before the change by checking the information display device 113 .

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-13 whether or not there has been a set value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-14, and if there is no set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-17.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value by +1 in step S19-14, and performs set value correction processing in step S19-15. Specifically, when the updated setting value is "5", which exceeds the appropriate range, a process of correcting the setting value to "1" is performed.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-16. Specifically, the set value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is updated. As a result, the game clerk can check the information display device 113 to grasp the updated setting value.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirming operation, the process is moved to step S19-18 assuming that the setting value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no setting value confirming operation, the setting value is updated. Assuming that there is a possibility that the

The main CPU 110a saves the setting value in the setting value area of the game RWM area in step S19-18, ends the display of the setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-19, and , the output of the setting changing signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is terminated. As a result, processing for ending acceptance of the setting change signal (security signal) is performed outside the game machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, etc.).

At step S19-21, the main CPU 110a clears the setting changing flag saved in the game RWM area, and ends the current setting change processing.

After that, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. will be done.

In this way, even if the set value is out of the proper range, the initial value “1” is set as the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game shop and the player from being troubled by the unexpected operation of the game machine.

Immediately after the setting change process is started, a setting change signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and immediately before the setting change process ends, the output of the setting change signal is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the start and end of processing (setting change) related to security in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, etc.), and it is possible to use it to detect fraudulent acts. Become.

Also, if the checksum is normal, only the error information area in the RWM area for information is initialized. , the state related to the error determination can be initialized for the convenience of the game arcade side, and the convenience can be improved.

In addition, during the setting change process (display of the screen during setting change), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start opening detection switch 45a, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 1st big winning opening detection switch 50a, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 53a, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a) monitor presence or absence of signal input. It is designed not to.

In other words, the occurrence of winning (entering a ball) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) Even if winning occurs during setting change processing (display of screen during setting change) by not monitoring (detecting) (a payout number designation command, which will be described later, is not sent to payout control board 120), the winning is invalid. As a result, game balls are not paid out. In addition, the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (an error designation command, which will be described later, is not sent to the effect control board 130), so that an error occurs during the setting change process (display of the screen during setting change). Also, error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play a game or commit a fraudulent act during the setting change.

Although the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the set value confirmation operation is performed, the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized after the setting value confirmation operation. You may make it change. Specifically, the processing from step S19-4 to step S19-9 may be performed after step S19-18. Also, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before the setting value confirmation operation and after the setting value confirmation operation.

Also, the setting key switch 112a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, but the RWM clear switch 111a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch may be turned OFF. Alternatively, the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be set to ON state.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

(Modified example of setting change processing)
A modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. Here, only the parts that are different from the setting change process of FIG. 20 will be explained, and the same step numbers will be assigned to the identical parts, and the explanation will be omitted.

In the modification of the setting change process shown in FIG. 21, steps S19-17A and S19-17B are provided between steps S19-17 and S19-18 in the setting change process shown in FIG.

The supervising CPU 141a displays the determined set value on the information display 113 in step S19-17A. Specifically, the set value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is maintained, and the DP (decimal point) of the 7-segment LED displaying the set value is lit. As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to check the information display device 113 to confirm that the setting value has been determined and to grasp the determined setting value.

The supervising CPU 141a determines in step S19-17B whether or not there is a setting change end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RW clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a setting change end operation, the process moves to step S19-18 assuming that the setting change mode is ended, and if there is no setting change end operation, the process of step S19-17B is repeated.

In this way, since the set values that have been set are displayed on the information display device 113 until the setting change end operation is performed, the set values that have been set can be accurately grasped, and the set values that have been set can be overlooked by the game clerk. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience.

In addition, since the display mode of the setting value before confirmation and the display mode of the setting value after confirmation are different, it is possible to accurately grasp that the setting value is confirmed, and the setting change is completed before the setting value confirmation operation is performed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of performing an operation.

Although the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the set value confirmation operation is performed, the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized after the setting value confirmation operation. You may make it change. Specifically, the processing from step S19-4 to step S19-9 may be performed after step S19-17A. Also, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before the setting value confirmation operation and after the setting value confirmation operation.

Also, the setting change end operation is performed by turning the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state. Alternatively, the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be set to ON state.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is within the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S24-2, and the set value is not within the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). If so, the process moves to step S24-10.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a starts outputting an RWM-clearing signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, indicating that the RWM is being cleared. As a result, processing for receiving the RWM clearing signal is performed outside the game machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, etc.).

The main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S24-3. As a result, the processing for executing the RWM clear preparation notification for notifying that the RWM clear is performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" means that a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is to be performed by operating the RWM clear switch 111a is displayed on the image display device, or that the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74 is cleared for RWM. It is to light all the lights in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white) during checking. It is also possible to output from the voice output device 9 a confirmation sound indicating that the RWM clear is being confirmed ("RWM is cleared by operating the RWM clear switch").

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a clear confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a clear confirmation operation, the process proceeds to step S24-5, and if there is no clear confirmation operation, the process of step S24-4 is repeated.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the set values) in the RWM area for the game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after prohibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling a predetermined information program by a CALL instruction is performed.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the error information area to be used for various error determinations in the information RWM area. As a result, the error judgment state is initialized to the initial state (state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the error judgment state before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-8, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return process. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

The main CPU 110a terminates the output of the RWM clearing signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 in step S24-9. As a result, a process for terminating acceptance of the RWM-clearing signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, etc.). When this process ends, the current RWM clear process ends.

After that, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. will take place.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S24-10. Specifically, the set value error information is displayed on the information display device 113, and after transmitting the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred on the performance control board 130, the timer interrupt is prohibited. After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the power supply is completely stopped. Perform processing to wait until disconnection.

In this way, if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the progress of the game is stopped by executing the unrecoverable error process to stop the progress of the game, thereby causing the gaming machine to perform unexpected operations. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, immediately after the RWM clearing process is started, an RWM clearing signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the output of the RWM clearing signal is terminated immediately before the RWM clearing process ends. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the start and end of security-related processing (RWM clear) in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, etc.), which can be used to detect fraudulent activities. Become.

Also, during RWM clear processing (display of clear confirmation screen), input devices other than RWM clear switch 111a and setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start opening detection switch 45a, third 2 Start hole detection switch 47a, first big winning hole detection switch 50a, second big winning hole detection switch 53a, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a) not monitored for signal input. It's like

In other words, the occurrence of winning (entering a ball) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) Even if winning occurs during the RWM clearing process (display of the clear confirmation screen), the winning is invalid because it is not monitored (detected) (a command for specifying the number of payouts, which will be described later, is not transmitted to the payout control board 120). As a result, game balls are not put out. In addition, by not monitoring (detecting) the occurrence of various errors (the error designation command is not sent to the effect control board 130), even if an error occurs during the RWM clearing process (clear confirmation screen display), an error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play a game or cheat while the RWM is being cleared.

It should be noted that when it is determined in step S24-1 that the set value is out of the proper range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing. , the set value may be set to the initial value "1" and the process of step S24-2 may be performed.

Also, the RWM clear designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed, but instead of the RWM clear designation command, the RWM clear start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, instead of the power-on designation command, an RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the RWM clearing end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clearing process, or may be transmitted after the RWM clearing process is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
The setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S26-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the proper range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S26-2, and the setting value is out of the proper range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past). If so, the process moves to step S26-8.

The main CPU 110a starts outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 in step S26-2. As a result, processing for receiving the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is performed outside the game machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S26-3. As a result, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

"Notification of setting confirmation" means displaying a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the image display device, or emitting a predetermined light from the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74 while the setting is being confirmed. It is to light up all in a color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming the setting value") indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S26-4. Specifically, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating a set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to grasp the current set value by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S26-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S26-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S26-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a terminates the display of the set values on the information display 113 in step S26-6, and outputs a setting confirmation signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 in step S26-7. end the output of As a result, a process for terminating acceptance of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, etc.). When this process ends, the current setting confirmation process ends.

After that, in step S29 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the power restoration notification by terminating the setting confirmation notification is performed. will be done.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S26-8. Specifically, the set value error information is displayed on the information display device 113, and after transmitting the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred on the performance control board 130, the timer interrupt is prohibited. After inhibiting interrupts and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the power supply is completely cut off. waits until the

In this way, if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the progress of the game is stopped by executing the unrecoverable error process to stop the progress of the game, thereby causing the gaming machine to perform unexpected operations. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

Immediately after the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and immediately before the setting confirmation process ends, the output of the setting confirmation signal is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the start and end of security-related processing (setting confirmation) in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, etc.), which can be used to detect fraudulent activities. Become.

In addition, during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting changing screen), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start opening detection switch 45a, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 1st big winning opening detection switch 50a, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 53a, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a) monitor presence or absence of signal input. It is designed not to.

In other words, the occurrence of winning (entering a ball) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) Even if winning occurs during the setting confirmation process (display of screen during setting change) due to non-monitoring (detection) (a command for specifying the number of payouts, which will be described later, is not sent to the payout control board 120), the winning is invalid. As a result, game balls are not paid out. In addition, by not monitoring (detecting) the occurrence of various errors (the error designation command is not sent to the effect control board 130), the error notification based on the occurrence of an error during the setting confirmation process (display of the screen during setting change) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play a game or cheat while the settings are being checked.

If it is determined in step S26-1 that the set value is out of the proper range, instead of proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, the set value is set to the initial value "1" and the process proceeds to step S26-2. You may make it move.

Also, a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting confirmation processing, and a power recovery designation command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing is completed. However, instead of the setting confirmation designation command, a setting confirmation start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In this embodiment, during execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 outputs a setting change signal, an RWM clear signal, and a setting confirmation signal. security signals are output, but these signals may be output from separate output terminals.

Further, in this embodiment, during execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, the security signal is output from the start of the process to the end of the process. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined period (for example, one second) at the timing of .

Further, in this embodiment, during execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning hole detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a) , 1st starting opening detection switch 45a, 2nd starting opening detection switch 47a, 1st big winning opening detection switch 50a, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 53a, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a ) is not monitored, but it may be monitored. In this case, only the presence or absence of signal input from the input device may be monitored, or the signal input of only a specific input device related to security such as the magnetic detection sensor 55a or the radio wave detection sensor 56a may be monitored, You may make it transmit an error designation|designated command to the production|presentation control board 130, when there is an input.

(Main RAM initialization trigger and initialization area)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initialization timing of the main RAM 110c and the initialization area.

As shown in FIG. 24, the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes the execution of setting change processing and the execution of RWM clear processing. , or the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is abnormal.

The game RWM area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing the checksum of the main RAM 110c, a game data area for storing data relating to the progress of the game, and data. A stack area for saving data and an unused area in which no data is stored are provided.

The RWM area for information stores a performance information area that stores information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 (a game ball count value, which will be described later, and a normal base value, which will be described later), and information used to determine various errors. An error information area, a stack area for saving data, and an unused area in which no data is stored are provided.

If the initialization trigger is setting change processing and the RWM area is abnormal, areas other than the setting value area are initialized (cleared to 0). On the other hand, when the initialization trigger is setting change processing and the RWM area is not abnormal, and when the initialization trigger is RWM clear processing, the stack area other than the setting value area, the performance information area, and the RWM area for information area is initialized (cleared to 0).

Although the performance information area and the error information area are provided in the information RWM area, at least one of them may be provided in the game RWM area. Even in this case, the initialization of the performance information area and the error information area The relationship between the trigger and the area to be initialized should be the same as described above. For example, when the error information area is provided in the game RWM area, the game RWM area is initialized when the setting change process or the RWM clear process is executed, but the information RWM area is not initialized.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110 .

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). It is executed by

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

The main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the regular pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs initial random value update processing in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as , and sets predetermined data if there is an input. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the fluctuation display of the first special design or the second special design, the big winning opening Processing such as opening and closing the (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 53), setting of the game state, etc. is performed. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal/universal electric power control processing. Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired general pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 44, normal symbol fluctuation display, opening and closing of the second start port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big winning opening 53) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S600. Specifically, the external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second big winning Special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display device 62, third 1 special design reservation display 63, special design reservation display data to be output to second special design reservation display 64, normal design reservation display data to be output to normal design reservation display 65, and other data are created.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (information program) in step S720. Specifically, it determines whether various errors (illegal prize winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error, which will be described later) have occurred, and an error designation command corresponding to the error that occurred to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes processing for performing error notification.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S740. Specifically, the number of payouts (the number of payout balls) that were to be paid out due to the winning of game balls to various winning ports, the number of outs (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 5a (shot to the game area) ) etc. is counted (collected). Details of the game ball counting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S760. Specifically, a process of calculating the performance information of the gaming machine from the number of payouts (number of balls paid out) and the number of outs (number of out balls) counted (collected) in the game ball counting process is performed. Details of the performance information calculation process will be described later.

In step S770, the main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program). Specifically, a process of setting performance display data for displaying the performance information calculated in the performance information calculation process on the information display 113 is performed. Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

In step S790, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return process. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S800. Specifically, port output processing for outputting signals such as the external output data created in step S600, start opening/closing data, big winning opening/closing data, etc., special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol pending display. data, normal symbol reserved display data, performance display data (performance information) set in step S770, and display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) to various displays, and are set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c A payout command transmission process for transmitting a command to the payout control board 120 and an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in a performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 or the effect control board 130 are executed. process.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode, timer interruption is not executed, so the number of payouts and the number of outs are counted, the performance information of the game machine is calculated, Since the performance information of the game machine is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95. process.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 53a, that is, the game ball wins the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 53 It is determined whether or not the game has been played, and processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, the processing for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the general pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing the general pattern determination information I do.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 . FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for the 3-ball prize by adding the data indicating the 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, determines the special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start mouth Terminate the detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special figure reservation number (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first special figure reservation number The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol memory specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S230-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, this first start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, referring to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14, the special figure determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the first special symbol is displayed, Figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) to generate the first start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying the effect control board 130.

At step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting opening winning designation command generated at step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first start winning prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start winning prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start winning prize designation command receives the first start winning prize designation command. Before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning designation command, a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that expects that the jackpot game will be executed over one or more variable displays ) can be executed.

In addition, since the same processing as the first starting hole detection switch input processing is performed for the second starting hole detection switch input processing, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counter, the first special figure reservation number (U1), 1st special figure determination information holding storage area, non-time-saving gaming state, 1st pre-determination process, 1st start opening winning designation command part, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counter, The second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, the time saving game state, the second pre-determination process, the second start opening winning designation command may be read.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the second special figure reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number may be less than the upper limit value of the first special figure reservation number. Furthermore, the second reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol memory determination processing (step S310) for starting the variable display of the special symbols based on the reserved memory is executed, and the special figure special electric processing data = If it is 1, the special symbol variation processing (step S320) for stopping and displaying the special symbol is executed by the lapse of the variation time, and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the stop time has elapsed and the stopped special symbol Special symbol stop processing (step S330) for shifting the processing to a jackpot game or a small hit game according to the type of is executed, and if special figure special electric processing data = 3, a jackpot game for executing a jackpot game Processing (step S340) is executed, if special figure special electric processing data = 4, jackpot game end processing (step S350) for ending the jackpot game is executed, if special figure special electric processing data = 5, A small winning game process (step S360) for executing a small winning game is executed. Details of each process will be described later.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. .

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. A special pattern storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores the command in the second special figure determination information storage area. Shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after subtraction A pattern storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in the main RAM 110c is set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

Also, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the number of second special figure reservations is shifted to the second 1 special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted), but the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area or the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area in the order in which the game ball entered the start hole You may shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number in order of winning), or give priority to the first special figure determination information reservation storage area over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (The first special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted over the second special figure reservation number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbols based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot determination process. The details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a refers to the set value stored in the game RWM area in step S311-1, and selects the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10 in step S311-2. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is shifted from the first special figure determination information holding storage area, FIG. ) is selected for the first special symbol shown in ), and if it is shifted from the second special symbol determination information holding storage area, the second special symbol big hit shown in FIG. Select a judgment table.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current odds game state and the random number value for judging a big win with the big-hit judging table to judge whether or not a big win has been won. If the big win is won, the process moves to step S311-4, and if the big win has not been won, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets winning state data (any of 00H to 02H) corresponding to the current game state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. ) is selected, and the process proceeds to step S311-9.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a checks the current odds game state and the random number value for big win determination against the big win determination table to determine whether or not a small win has been won. If the small win is won, the process moves to step S311-7, and if the small win is not won, the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for small winning shown in FIG. 11(c), and shifts the process to step S311-9.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing shown in FIG. 11(b), and shifts the process to step S311-9.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the random number for special symbol determination against the special symbol determination table for which the jackpot determination (lottery) is to be performed. Then, the special symbols to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display performed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 are determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the big hit determination process.

(Special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S313-2, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S313-3.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 12, and shifts the process to step S311-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 13, and shifts the process to step S310-7-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a collates the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the type of special symbol, the random number for reach judgment and the random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment with the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table, and the special figure fluctuation determine the pattern.

The main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S313-5, and the special figure variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern in step S313-6. A pattern specifying command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current special figure variation pattern determination processing is terminated. As a result, the special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in step S315 has elapsed. If the variable time has passed, the process is moved to step S320-2 to stop the variable display of the special symbols, and if the variable time has not passed, to continue the variable display of the special symbols, This time's special symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a sets data for stopping and displaying a special symbol corresponding to the stop special symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c to stop and display the special symbol. As a result, the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and the player is notified of the determination result of the big hit.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a pattern confirmation command corresponding to the stop special figure data set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-5, sets "2" to the special symbol special electric processing data. Set and end this special symbol variation process.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed. When the stop time has passed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and when the stop time has not passed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated in order to continue the stop display of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game end determination processing in step S330-2. Specifically, when the time saving game flag indicating that the time saving game state is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number (J) stored in the main RAM 110c, and the time saving number becomes "0". In the case of , the processing is terminated after shifting to a non-time-saving game state by clearing the time-saving game flag.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs high-probability game end determination processing. Specifically, when a high-probability game flag indicating a high-probability game state is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the high-probability number of times (X) stored in the main RAM 110c, and the high-probability number of times is When (X) is "0", the high probability game flag is cleared to shift to the low probability game state, and then the processing is terminated.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a game state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the game state grasped by the performance control board 130 or updating the performance mode is performed.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a big win special symbol. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-6, and if it is not a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-9.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" to prepare for moving to the jackpot game process, and in step S330-7, the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 110c. , the high probability game flag, the number of times of time saving (J) and the number of times of high probability (X) are cleared to shift to a low probability non-time saving game state.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process in step S330-8. Specifically, the type of the big winning game corresponding to the stop special figure data is determined from the large winning opening open mode determination table shown in FIG. 15, and the control data corresponding to the type of the big winning game is specified.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a small winning special symbol. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-10, and if it is not a small winning special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-14.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "5" and prepares to move to the small winning game processing, and in step S330-11 performs small winning start preparation setting processing. Specifically, the control data for the small winning game is specified.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game or the small win game in the performance transmission data storage area, and in step S330-13, sets the command to the type of the jackpot game or the small win game. The corresponding opening time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the current special symbol stop processing is terminated. As a result, the opening specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the opening effect of the jackpot game is performed.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0", prepares to move to the special symbol storage determination process, and ends the current special symbol stop process.

(Jackpot game processing on the main control board)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is "0". If it is currently opening, the process moves to step S340-2, and if it is not currently opening, the process moves to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-10 has elapsed. It is determined that the opening time has passed. If the opening time has passed, the process moves to step S340-3. When the opening time has not passed, the big win game processing of this time is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c and stored. Here, since no round game has been played yet, the number of round games (R) becomes "1".

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the number of openings (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is updated by adding "1". In addition, in order to open the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 or the second big winning opening opening/closing member 54, the energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b is set. At the same time, based on the current number of round games played (R) and the number of times opened (K), the opening time of the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a performs round designation command transmission determination processing in step S340-5. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K=1, and if K=1, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the round specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round game effect corresponding to the number of rounds is performed.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to a process after all preset round games are completed. Therefore, if it is currently ending, the process moves to step S340-18, and if it is not currently ending, the process moves to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b is set. As a result, when it is determined that the big winning opening is closed, the process proceeds to step S340-8, and when it is determined that the big winning opening is not closed, the process proceeds to step S340-9.

At step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time for the big winning opening set at step S340-10, which will be described later, has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the big winning game processing is terminated in order to maintain the closing of the big winning opening, and if the closing time has passed, the process proceeds to step S340-4 to open the big winning opening. transfer processing.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "open end condition" for ending the opening of the big winning opening is established. Specifically, whether or not the number of balls entering the big winning hole (C), which is the number of game balls entering the big winning hole, has reached a specified number (9), or 1 time in the number of opening times (K) It is determined whether or not the opening time has passed. If the "opening end condition" is established, the process proceeds to step S340-10, and if the "opening end condition" is not established, the big win game process is ended.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 or the second big winning opening opening/closing member 54, the energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 54b. is cleared, and based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the closing time of the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended. If one round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-12, and if one round game has not ended, this time's jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of opening times (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and the number of balls entering the big winning hole (C) is cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is the maximum value. If the number of round games (R) is the maximum value, the process moves to step S340-15, and if the number of round games (R) is not the maximum value, the process moves to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, stores it, and ends the current jackpot game process.

The main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c in step S340-15, sets the ending designation command in the effect transmission data storage area in step S340-16, At 17, the ending time corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the jackpot game processing of this time ends. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

At step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set at step S340-17 has elapsed. When the ending time has passed, in step S340-19, the special figure special electric processing data is set to "4" to prepare for shifting to the jackpot game end processing, and when the ending time has not passed, this time end the jackpot game processing.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data and winning state data stored in the main RAM 110c in step S350-1.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and performs processing as to whether or not to set a high probability flag based on the stop special figure data and winning state data. For example, if the stop special figure data is "02", a high probability flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and based on the stop special figure data and winning state data, sets the high probability number of times (X) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. do. For example, if the stop special figure data is "02", 50000 times is set as the high probability number of times (X).

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and performs processing as to whether or not to set the time saving game flag based on the stop special figure data and winning state data. For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", the time saving game flag is not set if the winning state data is 00H, but the time saving game flag is set if the winning state data is 01H or 02H.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and sets the number of times of time saving (J) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the stop special figure data and winning state data. . For example, if the stop special data is "01", if the state data at the time of winning is 00H, set 0 times as the number of times of working hours (J), and if the state data at the time of winning is 01H or 02H, the number of times of working hours (J) Set 100 times as

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the high probability flag and the time-saving game flag in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S350-7, special figure special electric processing. The data is set to 0 to prepare to move to the special symbol storage determination process, and the big winning game ending process of this time is finished.

(Abnormality judgment processing of the main control board)
The abnormality determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an abnormality determination process (information program) in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the game stack pointer in the information RWM area in step S721, sets the information stack pointer in step S722, and saves the register in the information RWM area in step S723.

In step S724, the main CPU 110a performs illegal winning error determination processing. Specifically, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, and when the game ball wins in the big winning port when not in the special game (jackpot game, small win game) Then, assuming that an illegal winning error has occurred, an illegal winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the fraudulent prize winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing fraudulent prize winning error notification (display of fraudulent prize winning error image on image display device, output of fraudulent prize winning error sound) is performed. It will be.

In step S725, the main CPU 110a performs abnormal winning error determination processing. Specifically, the number of game balls and the winning balls that have won the various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first start opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) When the number of game balls discharged from the flowing winning ball path does not match, an abnormal winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that an abnormal winning error has occurred. As a result, an abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing abnormal winning error notification (displaying an abnormal winning error image on the image display device and outputting an abnormal winning error sound) is performed. It will be.

The main CPU 110a performs magnetic error determination processing in step S726. Specifically, when the magnetism detecting sensor 55a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a magnetism error has occurred, and a magnetism error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the magnetic error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing magnetic error notification (display of magnetic error image on image display device, output of magnetic error sound) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs radio wave error determination processing in step S727. Specifically, when an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 56a for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a radio wave error has occurred, and a radio wave error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a radio wave error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing radio wave error notification (display of radio wave error image on image display device, output of radio wave error sound) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs door open error determination processing in step S728. Specifically, when the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a door opening error start designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that a door opening error has occurred, and the open detection switch 31a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. When the state is reached, the door open error termination designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that the door open error has been cancelled. As a result, a door open error start designation command and a door open error end designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 130, and door open error notification (display of door open error image on image display device, output of door open error sound). Processing for execution will be performed.

In step S729, the main CPU 110a performs operation error determination processing, and terminates the current abnormality determination processing. Specifically, when the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the initial setting process of step S10 described above is completed), an operation error occurs. An operation error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, an operation error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing operation error notification (displaying an operation error image on the image display device and outputting an operation error sound) is performed. Details of the operation error determination process will be described later.

In this way, while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the initial setting process of step S10 described above is completed), it is determined whether or not various errors (abnormalities) have occurred. In this case, the security of the gaming machine 1 can be ensured because the processing for performing the error notification is performed.

In addition, by executing the abnormality determination process with the performance program, it is possible to separate the functions of the game program (program related to game progress control) and the performance program (program not related to game progress control). , program design can be facilitated, and it is possible to contribute to the creation of more interesting game programs.

In the abnormality determination process, an operation error determination process for determining an illegal operation of the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is executed, but the operation error determination process may not be executed.

(Operation error judgment processing of the main control board)
Operation error determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing operation error determination processing (performance program) in the main control board.

First, in step S729-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If the state changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is assumed that a setting key error, which is one type of operation error, has occurred without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the process proceeds to step S729-2 to turn OFF. If the state has not changed to the ON state, the process proceeds to step S729-3.

In step S729-2, the main CPU 110a sets a setting key error start designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the setting key error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for starting the setting key error notification is performed.

In step S729-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If the ON state has changed to the OFF state, it is determined that the setting key error has been cleared, and the process proceeds to step S729-4. If the ON state has not changed to the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S729-5. Transfer.

In step S729-4, the main CPU 110a sets a setting key error termination designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the setting key error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for ending the setting key error notification is performed.

In step S729-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a is ON. If it is in the ON state, the processing is shifted to step S729-6 assuming that there is a possibility of a clear switch error, which is one type of operation error, without shifting to the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode, and the processing is shifted to step S729-6. If (it is in the OFF state), the process moves to step S729-9.

In step S729-6, the main CPU 110a updates the continuation counter for monitoring the period during which the RWM clear switch 111a continues to be ON, and in step S729-7, the continuation counter reaches a specified value (eg, 10). It is determined whether or not. If it is the specified value, it is assumed that a clear switch error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S729-8. Note that the continuation counter is set to RWM for information.

In step S729-8, the main CPU 110a sets a clear switch error designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the clear switch error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the clear switch error notification is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

In step S729-9, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) the continuation counter to 0, and terminates the current operation error determination process.

In this way, while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the initial setting process of step S10 described above is completed), the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a is monitored, and the operation is performed. In this case, operation error notification (setting key error notification, clear switch error notification) is performed, so it is possible to prevent unauthorized operations on the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a.

Further, even if the setting key switch 112a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode will not be entered. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the progress of the process becomes unstable.

Further, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed, the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode will not be entered. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the progress of the process becomes unstable.

When a setting key error occurs, the setting key error notification is executed until the setting key switch 112a turns from the ON state to the OFF state, but it may be continued until the power is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easier to discover unauthorized operations, and it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of unauthorized actions.

Also, when a clear switch error occurs, the clear switch error notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), but it may be continued until the power is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easier to discover unauthorized operations, and it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of unauthorized actions.

Also, while the setting key error notification and the clear switch error notification are being executed, the occurrence of the clear switch error is not determined, and it is set that the RWM clear switch 111a is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state). The key error notification and clear switch error notification may be terminated.

Moreover, although both the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are monitored, it is also possible to monitor only one of them and perform the operation error notification.

(Game ball counting process of main control board)
The game ball counting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the game ball counting process (information program) in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S741, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of payouts in the normal game state, is counted, and the process proceeds to step S742, and if it is not in the normal game state, the normal medium payout number is not counted. Then, the process moves to step S750.

In step S742, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball did not enter the general winning hole 43, and the process proceeds to step S744. wins, in step S743, "5", which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the normal winning opening 43, is added to the normal medium payout number counter for counting the number of normal medium payouts. The normal medium payout number counter is set in the RWM area for information.

In step S744, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 53a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball did not enter the large winning opening, and the process proceeds to step S746. Then, in step S745, "15", which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the big winning opening, is added to the normal middle payout number counter.

The number of payouts (number of prize balls) when the game balls enter the first big winning hole 50 is 15, and the number of payouts (number of prize balls) when the game balls win the second big winning hole 53 is set to 15. The number of payouts corresponding to each big winning slot may be different, such as ten. In that case, when a detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the first big winning hole 50, which is "15", is set in the normal medium payout number counter. When the detection signal is input from the second big winning hole detection switch 53a, the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the second big winning hole 53, ie, "10" is added to the normal medium payout number counter. good.

In step S746, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball did not enter the first start port 45, and the process proceeds to step S748. Assuming that the game ball has won, "3", which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the first starting port 45, is added to the normal medium payout number counter in step S747.

In step S748, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball did not enter the second starting port 47, and the process proceeds to step S750. Assuming that the game ball has won, "2", which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the second starting port 47, is added to the normal medium payout number counter in step S749.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the out-ball detection switch 57a. When the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that there is no out ball, which is the game ball discharged from the game area 5a, and the current game ball counting process is terminated. When the detection signal is input, Assuming that there is an out ball, in step S751, "1" is added to a total out number counter for counting out balls (total number of outs) in all game states. The total number of outs counter is set in the RWM area for information.

In step S752, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is not in the normal game state, the current game ball counting process is terminated, and if it is in the normal game state, in step S753, the number of outs in the normal game state (the number of outs during normal play) is counted. "1" is added to the normal out number counter, and the current game ball counting process is terminated. It should be noted that the normal out number counter is set in the RWM area for information.

In this way, before the progress control of the game is performed (initial setting process of step S10 described above), the number of payouts and the number of outs are not counted and stored, and while the progress control of the game is performed (described above). Since the number of normal payouts, the number of normal outs, and the total number of outs, which are the game information (history information) after the initial setting process in step S10 is completed, are counted and stored, the player can execute the game. It is possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value to be described later) of the gaming machine at that time, and it is possible to use it for calculating performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine.

In addition, even if a game ball wins a prize in a big winning hole due to a small winning game during the normal game state, the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the big winning hole is added to the normal medium payout number counter "15". However, when a game ball wins a prize in a large winning opening by a small winning game during the normal game state, the number of payouts may not be added to the normal payout number counter.

(Performance information calculation processing of main control board)
The performance information calculation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the performance information calculation process (information program) in the main control board 110. FIG.

In this embodiment, the state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 is divided into a plurality of game intervals, and performance information is displayed for understanding (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, the game section will be explained first.

The game section is divided by the total number of outs, and the total number of outs counted from the first power-on or from the clearing (initialization) of the information RWM area to 0 due to data abnormality is 300. is the first game section, and after the first game section, the game section switches every 60,000 total outs, and the second game section, the third game section, the fourth game section, and so on. It becomes the N game section.

First, in step S761, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the section counter for counting the number of the game section is the first game section value (0) indicating the first game section. do. If it is the first game section value, the current game section is considered to be the first game section for which the performance information is not calculated, and the process proceeds to step S762. Assuming that it is the game section after the second game section to be calculated, the process proceeds to step S763. Note that the section counter is set in the RWM area for information.

In step S762, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If it is equal to or greater than the first section update value, the process proceeds to step S768 assuming that the game section is to be updated. Terminate the calculation process.

In step S763, the main CPU 110a converts the number of normal medium payouts in the current game section indicated by the normal medium payout number counter and the number of normal outs in the current game section indicated by the normal medium out number counter into normal basis as performance information. A value is calculated and rounded off to the first decimal place, and in step S764, the normal base value after rounding off is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the RWM area for information.

"Normal base value" refers to the amount of game value used in the game during the normal game state (the number of outs, which is the number of game balls shot into the game area or discharged from the game area), during the normal game state It is the ratio (ratio) of the amount of game value awarded in the game (the number of payouts, which is the number of game balls to be paid out to the player). The number of payouts during normal play/the number of outs during normal play, which is the number of outs in the normal game state)×100.

"Base storage area" is a storage area for storing the normal base value in the four game intervals, the first area for storing the normal base value in the current game interval, A second area for storing the normal base value in the game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before and a fourth area.

In step S765, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If it is equal to or greater than the second interval update value, the process proceeds to step S766 assuming that the game interval is to be updated. Terminate the calculation process.

In addition, the total number of outs is 60,000, which separates the second and subsequent game sections, but this number of 60,000 is about one day's worth of a game machine that shoots 100 game balls per minute. It is a figure that can guarantee the operating amount of Therefore, the game section is updated when the gaming machine operates for about one day.

In step S766, the main CPU 110a shifts the contents of the first to third areas of the base storage area downward by one, and in step S767 clears the first area of the base storage area to zero. As a result, the normal base value stored in each area is stored as the normal base value for the previous game interval, the normal base value for the current game interval is reset, and preparations are made to shift to the next game interval. will be

In step S768, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the section counter to update the game section. and the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter are cleared to 0, the process of shifting to the next game section is performed, and the performance information calculation process of this time ends.

In this way, by updating the game section based on the total number of outs, it is possible to allow a state in which different setting values are set in one game section. Therefore, it is possible to obtain (store) game information (history information such as the total number of outs, the number of normal outs, the number of normal medium payouts, etc.) spanning a plurality of set values in one game section, and is hindered by setting changes. performance information (normal base value) can be calculated without

In addition, since a normal base value (a type of history information) is calculated and stored from the number of normal outs and the number of normal payouts for each game section as performance information for each game section, It is possible to provide information for appropriately grasping (evaluating) the actual performance.

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). It is possible to calculate, store, and display performance information (normal base value) from which the influence of is eliminated, which can be used to grasp the performance of the game machine 1 .

In addition, by not calculating the normal base value in the first game section, it is possible to check the operation of the game machine during the pre-shipment inspection (check the operation of the detection switches for various winning openings and the out-ball detection switch due to the shooting and maintenance of game balls). ), it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the actual performance of the gaming machine.

In addition, by calculating the normal base value from the second game section onwards, it is possible to display a highly credible normal base value that eliminates the influence of the pre-shipment inspection of the game machine, and the actual performance of the game machine. It is possible to provide highly credible information for accurately grasping.

Each time the performance information calculation process is executed (every 4 milliseconds), the normal base value is calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area. is displayed on the information display 113 (every 20 seconds), the normal base value in the current game section may be calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area.

In addition, in the first game section, the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal are counted even though the normal base value is not calculated. can be

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the performance display data setting process (information program) in the main control board 110.

First, in step S771, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the display switching time counter for determining whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is the display switching value (0). If it is the display switching value, the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step S772. The processing moves to step S776 assuming that the performance information to be used is not to be switched. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value. Also, the display switching time counter is set in the RWM area for information.

In step S772, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S774. , the process proceeds to step S773. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 773, the main CPU 110a generates display data for lighting confirmation for lighting all the segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. It is determined, and the process moves to step S776.

In step S774, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained. Note that the data selection counter value is updated in step S782, which will be described later.

In step S775, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) to display the information display device 113 based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. , the display data of the normal base value to be displayed is determined, and the process proceeds to step S776.

In step S776, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the RWM area for information in the output control process (game program) of step S800 described above is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is obtained as information. It will be displayed on the display 113 . The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above display switching time counter in step S777, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds) in step S778. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S785. In step S779, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized).

In step S780, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-described lighting-confirmed flag exists in the information RWM area. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S782, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S781, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area, and the process proceeds to step S785. .

In step S782, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter, and in step S783, determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If not larger than the upper limit, the process moves to step S785, and if larger than the upper limit, in step S784, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized), and the process moves to step S785.

In step S785, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area in step S723, and in step S786 restores the game stack pointer saved in the information RWM area in step S721. End the display data setting process.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 41, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

Also, by the out ball detection switch 57a, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 53, and the out opening 39 Instead of detecting an out ball made up of game balls that have flowed into the outlet, only a game ball that has flowed into the out hole may be detected by the out ball detection switch 57a. In that case, out ball detection switch 57a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch The number of outs (the number of total outs, the number of normal outs) should be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 53a.

(Example of information display)
Next, display examples 1 to 7 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Information display example 1)
A display example 1 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a display example when the setting is changed when the power is turned on for the first time.

First, when the power is turned on for the first time, the main control board 110 enters the initial control stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting change operation has not been performed, an unrecoverable error due to checksum abnormality occurs, and error information "Er.FF" indicating the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the power is turned off. The error information continues to be displayed until it is turned off.

On the other hand, when the setting change operation is being performed, the setting change mode is entered, the provisional setting value "1" is displayed on the information display 113, and each time the setting value update operation is performed, the information display The set value displayed in 113 is updated from "1"→"2"→"3". When the set value confirmation operation is performed in that state, the set value "3" displayed on the information display 113 immediately before is confirmed and saved in the set value area of the game RWM, and displayed on the information display 113. The setting value "3" is erased and the setting change mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started, and the normal control in which the progress control of the game is performed is performed. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

In this way, when the setting value is displayed on the information display 113, the setting value is displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 in the same manner as when displaying the numerical value of the normal base value. can be easily recognized.

In addition, when displaying a set value consisting of a single-digit number, unlike when displaying the normal base value, it is displayed without adding "0" to the tens place, so the normal base value and the It becomes difficult to confuse them, and it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the display is a setting value.

In addition, when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time (the setting value is not saved), the error information of the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so the setting value is set. It is possible to make it easier to recognize what must be done.

When displaying the set value, it is not displayed on the 7-segment display 113d indicating the ones digit of the numerical segment, but on any one of the other 7-segment displays 113a to 113c of the information display 113. Alternatively, two or more 7-segment displays of the information display 113 may display the set values.

Further, when displaying the setting value, identification information (for example, "St.") indicating the setting value may be displayed in the identification segment, and the setting value may be displayed in the numeric segment. In that case, the set value may be displayed in the ones digit of the numerical segment, or the set value may be displayed in the tens digit.

Further, the set values are not displayed only on the information display device 113, but the special pattern display device and the normal pattern display device visible from the front side of the game machine 1 are configured with a 7-segment display device to display the special pattern. The setting value may be displayed on either one of the device and the normal symbol display device.

(Information display example 2)
Display example 2 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display example when the RWM clear is performed when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

First, when the power is turned on (power supply), the main control board 110 enters the initial control stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, when the RWM clear operation is performed, the mode is shifted to the RWM clear mode. , an unrecoverable error occurs due to an abnormal set value, and the error information "Er.FF" indicating the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the display of the error information continues until the power is turned off. .

On the other hand, if the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4), the information display 113 waits for a clear confirmation operation, and what is displayed on the information display 113? is not displayed, and when the clear confirmation operation is performed, the RWM clear mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started, and the normal control in which the progress control of the game is performed is performed. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

In this way, in the RWM clear mode when the set values are normal, no information (for example, set values or performance information) is displayed on the information display 113, so that fraudulent acts such as shifting to the RWM clear mode are performed. Even if the information is stolen, the information that the game parlor wants to keep secret will not be leaked, and the security of the game machine can be improved.

Also, when the set value is abnormal, the error information of the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the set value must be set.

(Information display example 3)
A display example 3 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a display example when setting confirmation is performed when power is turned on (power is turned on again).

First, when the power is turned on (the power is turned on again), the main control board 110 enters the initial control, which is the stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting confirmation mode is entered. , the error information "Er.FF" indicating the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the display of the error information continues until the power is turned off.

On the other hand, when the set value saved in the set value area of the RWM area for game is within the proper range (1 to 4), the information display 113 displays the current set value (here, "1"). , the confirmation end operation is awaited, and when the confirmation end operation is performed, the set value "1" displayed on the information display 113 is erased, and the setting confirmation mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started, and the normal control in which the progress control of the game is performed is performed. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

In this way, when the set value is abnormal, the error information of the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the set value must be set. .

(Information display example 4)
Display example 4 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display example when the game progress control is started and the first game section is started.

When the progress control of the game is started and it is under normal control, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit. , this state continues for 5 seconds.

After that, when the lighting confirmation is completed, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification segment flashes the first identification information "bL." indicating that it is the current game section, and the numeric segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "--". lights up.

In addition, when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, the blinking display of the identification segment is a blinking display with a cycle of 0.6 seconds that repeats lighting for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds. The same applies to the blinking display of the identification segment that appears in the following description.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

Furthermore, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the third identification information "b2." indicating that it is the game section two times before, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section 3 times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg blinks the third identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numeric seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the first game section reaches 300 and the first game section ends, the display of the normal base value from the current game section to the game section three times before is displayed. Each time the switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the switching is performed in order.

In this way, before displaying the normal base value in each game section in order, the lighting of the information display 113 is confirmed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), so that each segment of the information display 113 is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the numerical value when the normal base value is displayed after that.

In addition, since the time for checking the lighting is the same as the time for displaying the normal base value in each game section, it is possible to easily recognize the idling period before displaying the normal base value.

In addition, since there is no normal base value to be calculated in the first game section, the normal base value is not displayed. It is possible to improve the reliability of the displayed normal base value.

In addition, for the display of a plurality of game intervals in which there is no calculated normal base value, "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value is commonly displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113. , it becomes possible to easily recognize that there is no calculated normal base value.

(Information display example 5)
Display example 5 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a display example when switching from the first game section to the second game section.

First, in the first game section, the information display 113 displays the normal base value in the game section two times before in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the third identification information "b2." indicating that it is the game section two times before, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

After that, when the total number of outs in the first game section reaches 300 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the first game section ends and the second game section starts, but the display switching time is reached. The display of the normal base value up to that point continues until a certain 5 seconds have passed.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds has elapsed, the normal base value in the game section 3 times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg blinks the third identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numeric seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

Furthermore, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification segment flashes the first identification information "bL." indicating the current game section, and the numerical segment displays the calculated normal base value "23" lit. be.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds has elapsed, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the third identification information "b2." indicating that it is the game section two times before, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section reaches 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the game section from the current game section to the game section three times before is displayed for 5 seconds, which is the display switching time. It will be switched in order each time it passes.

Thus, even if the game section is switched while the normal base value of the predetermined game section is being displayed, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses. In addition, the display of the normal base value will not end halfway due to the switching of the game section, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as difficulty in recognizing the normal base value.

In addition, even if the game section is switched, instead of starting from the display of the normal base value of the current game section, the display order up to that point is inherited (for example, the normal base value of the game section two times before) If the game section switches during the display of the value, the normal base value displayed next will be the normal base value of the game section three times before), so the normal base value in each game section will change due to the switching of the game section. It is possible to make it easy to recognize the normal base value of each game section without suddenly changing the display order.

(Information display example 6)
Display example 6 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display example when the display mode of the normal base value of the current game interval is switched during the second game interval.

First, in the second game section, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification segment flashes the first identification information "bL." indicating the current game section, and the numerical segment displays the calculated normal base value "36" lit. be.

After that, when the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 6000 or more before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, a highly credible normal base value can be calculated and the display mode of the normal base value is changed. Although the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the normal base value is displayed in the previous blinking display mode until the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds has elapsed, the normal base value in the game section two times before (here, before the game section occurs) is displayed in a blinking display mode on the information display 113 . Specifically, the identification seg flashes the third identification information "b2." indicating that it is the game section two times before, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section 3 times before (here, before the game section occurs) is displayed in a blinking display mode on the information display 113 . Specifically, the identification segment blinks the fourth identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." indicating the current game section is displayed in the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is displayed in the numerical segment. be.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section reaches 60000 and the third game section is reached, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is switched. It switches in order every time 5 seconds, which is the time, elapses.

In this way, when a credible normal base value can be displayed, the display mode of the target normal base value (the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment) is switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize whether the normal base value is credible or not credible.

Further, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is established while the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, the blinking display mode is continued until the display switching time elapses. Therefore, the same normal base value is not displayed in a plurality of display modes during the display switching time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as difficulty in recognizing the normal base value.

(Information display example 7)
Display example 7 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a display example when switching from the second game section to the third game section.

First, in the second game section, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." indicating the current game section is displayed in the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is displayed in the numerical segment. be.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the second identification information "b1." indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

Then, when the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 60,000 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the second game section ends, the third game section starts, and the normal base in each game section Although the condition for switching the display of the value is satisfied, the display of the normal base value up to that point continues until the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

Furthermore, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before (here, the first game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification seg flashes the third identification information "b2." indicating that it is the game section two times before, and the numerical seg indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section 3 times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification segment blinks the fourth identification information "b3." indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value "- -” is displayed.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds has elapsed, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the third game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the identification segment flashes the first identification information "bL." indicating the current game section, and the numeric segment displays the calculated normal base value "08" lit. be.

Furthermore, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the identification seg lights up the second identification information "b1." indicating the previous game section, and the numerical seg lights up the calculated normal base value "36". Is displayed.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the third game section reaches 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the game section from the current game section to the game section three times before is displayed for 5 seconds, which is the display switching time. It will be switched in order each time it passes.

In this way, when displaying the normal base value of the game section in which the possibility of the calculation result of the normal base value changing has disappeared, the lighting display mode is the same as the display mode when displaying the credible normal base value. Since it is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize that there is no longer a possibility that the calculation result of the normal base value will change.

In this embodiment, the first game section is set until the total number of outs reaches 300. However, if the value is less than 60,000, which is the total number of outs after the second game section, the total number of outs is less than 300. It can be more or less. Also, the total number of outs after the second game section may be more or less than 60,000.

Further, in this embodiment, when the information RWM area is cleared to 0 (initialized) due to data abnormality, the game is restarted from the first game section. You may make it start from the 2 game area.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the game section is switched while the predetermined normal base value is being displayed, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses, and the normal base value is displayed. The display order is also inherited, but when the game section is switched, the display of the normal base value of the current game section may be started, or after the display switching time has elapsed, the display of the current game section You may start from the display of a normal base value.

Further, in this embodiment, when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the blinking display will continue until the display switching time elapses. Although the display mode is continued, it may be switched to the lighting display mode immediately when the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is established.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal base value in each game section is displayed sequentially without an interval period (non-display period), but it may be displayed sequentially with an interval period of a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). can be

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (when the progress control of the game becomes possible), the lighting of the information display 113 is always confirmed. However, the lighting confirmation may not be performed after at least one of the setting change processing for displaying the set value on the information display 113 and the setting confirmation processing is completed. When the confirmation process is performed, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (when the progress control of the game becomes possible), the lighting of the information display 113 is confirmed. However, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, the lighting confirmation may be performed before the setting value is displayed during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on for the first time (setting values are not saved) or when the saved setting values are abnormal when the power is turned on for the second time or later, an unrecoverable error occurs and error information is displayed. is displayed, the error information displayed on the information display 113 may be different between the former case and the latter case.

(Main processing of payout control unit)
Main processing of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing main processing in the payout control section 121. As shown in FIG. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the payout CPU 121a.

First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts in step H1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step H2, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c in step H3.

The payout CPU 121a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the payout RAM 121c in step H4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted in step H6.

In step H7, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not it has received a power cut-off designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when power cut occurs. If the power-off designation command is received, the process proceeds to step H8, and if the power-off designation command is not received, the process of step H7 is repeatedly executed.

In step H8, the payout CPU 121a sets interruption prohibition for inhibiting timer interruption, loads the number of game balls that have not been paid out from the payout counter of the payout RAM 121c in step H9, and loads the number of unpaid game balls that have not been paid out in step H10. , and transmits to the main control board 110 a remaining payout number designation command corresponding to the loaded unpaid number.

The payout CPU 121a clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various driving sources (motor, solenoid, etc.) in step H11, prohibits RWM access in step H12, and thereafter the power supply is completely cut off. wait until

(Timer interrupt processing of payout control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the payout control unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the payout control unit. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the payout control unit 121 .

First, in step H100, the payout CPU 121a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the payout RWM area, and in step H200, performs timer update processing. and processing to update various timer counters such as interval time provided after payout of game balls.

The payout CPU 121a performs command analysis processing in step H300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area for payout is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs input control processing in step H400. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the open detection switch 31a, the payout ball detection switch 95a, the full detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 96a, the lending button detection switch, the return button detection switch, etc. When there is an input, processing such as setting of predetermined data is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs prize ball control processing in step H500. Specifically, a process for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 corresponding to the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs ball lending control processing in step H600. Specifically, when the lending button 20a is operated, while performing ball lending communication with a ball lending machine (not shown) installed side by side with the gaming machine 1, one unit of game balls equivalent to 100 yen is provided. , a process for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs a firing permission control process in step H700. Specifically, based on the reception of the firing permission designation command from the main control board 110, the firing permission flag is saved in the firing permission flag area set in the work area of the payout RAM 121c. In addition, it is determined whether or not the firing permission condition that the firing permission flag is saved and is normally connected to a lending device (so-called ball lending machine) installed in parallel with the game machine 1 is satisfied, When the shooting permission condition is satisfied, the shooting control unit 122 is allowed to shoot the game ball, and when the shooting permission condition is not met, the shooting control unit 122 is prohibited from shooting the game ball. I do.

The payout CPU 121a performs abnormality determination processing in step H750. Specifically, based on input signals from the full detection switch 32a and the ball presence detection switch 96a, the occurrence of a plate full error, ball shortage error, etc. is determined, and a plate full error designation command, ball shortage error designation command, etc. are determined. to the effect control board 130.

The payout CPU 121a performs data creation processing in step H800. Specifically, the external output data output from the game information output terminal board 90 (prize ball schedule signal output by 1 pulse each time the condition for paying out 10 game balls is satisfied, 10 game balls A data creation process is performed to create data such as a prize ball payout signal that is output by one pulse each time a ball is paid out, drive data for driving the payout motor 95b, and the like.

The payout CPU 121a performs an output control process in step H900. Specifically, processing for outputting signals such as external output data and drive data created in step H800, processing for outputting various commands set in step H750 to the effect control board 130, and the like are performed. In addition, instead of transmitting the command directly from the payout control unit 121 to the effect control board 130, the command is sent from the payout control unit 121 to the main control board 110, and this command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. may be made.

In step H1000, the payout CPU 121a restores the information saved in step H100 to the register of the payout CPU 121a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the payout control unit 121 receives the launch permission designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and when the lending device provided in parallel with the game machine 1 is normally connected, the launch control unit 121 In order to allow the unit 122 to shoot a game ball, during the initial setting process in which the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game (for example, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, during the setting confirmation mode) Even if there is, it is possible to shoot a game ball by the shooting device 26. - 特許庁

Also, in the payout control unit 121, since the prize ball control process and the ball lending control process are executed regardless of the control state of the main control board 110, the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. Even during execution (for example, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, during the setting confirmation mode), it is possible to pay out game balls.

Specifically, since the payout of prize balls is performed based on the receipt of the payout number designation command from the main control board 110, the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. During execution, it is virtually impossible to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, the ball rental is not carried out based on the reception of commands from the main control board 110, but is carried out as a result of lending communication with the lending device based on the operation of the lending button 20a by the player. Therefore, even when the main control board 110 is executing the initial setting process in which the progress of the game is not controlled, it is possible to pay out rental balls.

When the main control board 110 is not controlling the progress of the game (during execution of the initial setting process), the shooting control section 122 may be prohibited from shooting game balls. In this case, when the main control board 110 is controlling the progress of the game (for example, the payout control process in step S500 of the timer interrupt process after the initial setting process is completed), the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c , and the firing permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the subsequent output control processing of step S800.

Also, when the main control board 110 is not controlling the progress of the game (during execution of the initial setting process), it is possible to prohibit the payout of game balls (at least one of prize balls and rental balls). good. In this case, the game balls are prohibited from being put out until a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, and when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, It is preferable to allow the payout of game balls.

(Modified example of main processing of payout control unit)
A modification of the main processing of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing a modification of the main processing of the payout control section 121. As shown in FIG.

In this modification, it is assumed that a backup power supply is supplied to the payout RAM 121c, and when a payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls area of the payout RAM 121c, and the prize is determined. It is assumed that the payout control board 120 performs processing related to payout of prize balls based on the value of the number-of-balls area. Therefore, even if the power shutdown designation command is received from the main control board 110, the remaining payout number designation command is not transmitted to the main control board 110. - 特許庁

First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts in step H1a, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step H2a, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c in step H3a.

In step H4a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step H5a assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step H7a assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

The payout CPU 121a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c in step H5a, and determines whether or not the checksum is normal in step H6a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c matches the checksum calculated in step H5a. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step H8a. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), step H7a , initializes (clears to 0) the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c.

The payout CPU 121a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) at step H8a, and permits all interrupts at step H9a.

The payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received in step H10a. When the power restoration designation command is received (restore to the control state before power failure), the process is shifted to step H15a, and when the power restoration designation command is not received, the process is shifted to step H11a.

The payout CPU 121a determines whether or not a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received in step H11a. When the power-on designation command is received (do not restore the control state before power-off), the process proceeds to step H12a, and when the power-on designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step H15a.

At step H12a, the payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, at step H13a, clears the output port to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.), and at step H14a. , Initializes (0 clears) areas other than the launch permission flag area of the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c (including the number of prize balls area).

The payout CPU 121a determines whether or not a power-off designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received in step H15a. If the power-off designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step H10a, and if the power-off designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step H16a.

The payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step H16a, clears the output port to stop the operation of various driving sources (motor, solenoid, etc.) in step H17a, and clears the output port in step H18a. , clears the firing permission flag saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c.

At step H19a, the payout CPU 121a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c at step H20, and saves it in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

The payout CPU 121a saves in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is backed up (restored power supply) in step H20a, and prohibits RWM access in step H21a. Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, even if the checksum is abnormal, unlike the main control board 110, the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is initialized without executing the unrecoverable error process, and the game ball payout control can be executed. In order to achieve such a state, although the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game, the payout control board 120 does not perform only the payout control of the game balls, and the player suffers a disadvantage. can be avoided.

In addition, since the area other than the firing permission flag area of the payout RAM 121c is initialized by receiving the power-on designation command from the main control board 110, when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized, the RWM area (prize ball) of the payout RAM 121c is initialized. area) is also initialized, the control state of the main control board 110 and the control state of the payout control board 120 can be matched, and the game machine can avoid an unexpected operation. becomes possible.

As with the main RAM 110c, the payout RAM 121c has a payout RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a payout program for performing payout control such as game ball payout, and information control such as error determination. and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program for performing Both areas will be initialized (cleared to 0).

(Main processing of production control section)
Main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart of main processing in the effect control section 130m. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the sub CPU 130a.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

In step E4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is shifted to step E5 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is shifted to step E8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

The sub CPU 130a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c in step E5, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step E6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c matches the checksum calculated in step E5. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step E7. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step E8. transfer processing.

In step E7, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) areas other than the history information area in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power interruption (power failure) is inherited even after the power is restored.

In step E8, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power interruption (power failure) is not taken over after the power is restored.

The sub CPU 130a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) at step E9, permits all interrupts at step E10, and updates the sub random number at step E11. I do. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed.

In step E12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the power shutdown designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. If the power shutdown designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E13, and if the power shutdown designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E11.

The sub-CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E13, and clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.) in step E14.

At step E15, the sub CPU 130a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c and saves it in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

At step E16, the sub CPU 130a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c has been backed up (restored power) in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, unlike the payout control unit, it does not determine whether or not the power-on designation command is received and initialize the entire RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Even when the RWM clear is executed, the game history information can be handed over, and the game history information can be provided to the player for a long period of time.

It is also possible to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and to initialize the entire RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c when the power-on designation command is received. Alternatively, only the history information area may be initialized instead of the entire RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 130m. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control section 130m.

First, at step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the effect RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and at step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control section 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area for effect is performed. Details of the command analysis process will be described later.

In step E400, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect control process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed in the customer waiting state in which the special symbol fluctuation display and the special game (jackpot game, small winning game) are not executed, and the customer Processing for executing a customer waiting performance for stimulating a player's willingness to play is performed based on the lapse of the waiting time.

The sub CPU 130a performs effect input control processing in step E500. Specifically, during the variable effect, based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the effective period, an operation notice effect is executed to make the player expect that the special game will be executed, or the special game is executed. Performs processing for determining whether or not to perform an operation to execute an effect, and saves it in a sub-RAM 130c based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the valid period during the customer waiting state. processing for displaying the stored game history information on the image display device and for initializing (resetting) the game history information saved in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the production mode (production stage) in which the production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance where the result is lost, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, the performance mode is changed to multiple performances. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

“Production mode” includes production modes A to C set in a low-probability short-time gaming state, production modes D-E set in a low-probability short-time gaming state, and production mode set in a high-probability short-time gaming state. F to G are provided. In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to a low-probability short-time gaming state (for example, after changing the setting, after clearing RWM, after confirming the setting, etc.), the first production mode is always production mode A. When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first when it is controlled to the low-probability short-time gaming state is always the production mode D, and when the power is turned on, it is controlled to the high-probability short-time gaming state. The effect mode set first is the effect mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs game history update processing in step E700. Specifically, processing for updating the game history information saved in the sub-RAM 130c according to the progress of the game (execution of fluctuation effect, big win game, small win game) is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

At step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the effect RWM area at step E100, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
The command analysis processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting change notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an RWM clear designation command. If it is the RWM clear designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not the RWM clear designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs RWM clear notification processing in step E305. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described RWM clear preparation notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the RWM clear preparation notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing in step E307. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E310.

In step E309, the sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. In the case of , a process of setting a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing power-on notification or power restoration notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not an error system designation command, the process moves to step E312.

"Error type designation command" includes unrecoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door open error start designation command, door open error end designation Commands, operation error specification commands, etc. are included.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E311. Specifically, error notification according to the type of error designation command received (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification etc.), the notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is a customer waiting state designation command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a customer waiting state designation command, the process moves to step E314.

In step E313, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect preparation process. Specifically, a customer waiting effect wait flag and a customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) until starting the customer waiting effect are set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the customer waiting effect waiting flag and the customer waiting time are referred to in the above-described customer waiting effect control process, and the process for executing the customer waiting effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step E315, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step E316.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E315. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E317, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E318.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E317. Specifically, the process of setting the effect instruction command to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special figures stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device conduct. As a result, an effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a start opening winning designation command. If it is a starting mouth winning designation command, the received starting mouth winning designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in the later-described prefetch storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and then the process is moved to step E319, and the starting mouth winning designation If it is not a command, the process moves to step E320.

The "prefetching storage area" is the first prefetching storage unit for sequentially storing the prefetching information (such as the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) based on the first starting entry winning designation command, and the second starting entry winning designation Command Reservation information based on and the storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing the prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed, and the first prefetch The storage section and the second look-ahead storage section are divided into first to fourth storage sections, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and receive the first start opening winning designation command Then, the prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and receive the second starting entrance winning designation command Then, the prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the second special figure reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special figure determination information execution storage area described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit The prefetch information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prefetch information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second prefetch unit is stored. be.

In step E319, the sub CPU 130a performs prefetch effect determination processing. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, it is expected that the big win game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that the big win game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed are determined, and a process of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c for executing the look-ahead effect is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

As the look-ahead effect, an icon change effect that displays the suspended icon displayed on the image display device or the icon in a special display mode different from the normal display mode, and a predetermined effect during one or more variable displays (variable effects). There is a look-ahead continuous announcement effect etc. to be executed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command in step E320. If it is a special design designation command, the process moves to step E321, and if it is not a special design designation command, the process moves to step E322.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E321. Specifically, a process for determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, etc. is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command in step E322. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E323, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E326.

In step E323, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, based on a special figure variation pattern specified by a special figure variation pattern specification command and a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown), the variation that is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the effect device including the image display device A performance pattern is determined, and a processing of setting a performance instruction command for executing a variable performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable production is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs an announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E323, a big win notice performance is executed to make the player expect that the big win game will be executed (suggest that the big win game may be executed). It decides whether or not, the type of big hit notice effect to be executed, and sets the effect instruction command for executing the big win notice effect to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the jackpot announcement effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect execution process in step E325. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead effect determined in the look-ahead effect determination process of step E319 or changing the effect mode to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a pattern confirmation command. If it is a design determination command, the process moves to step E327, and if it is not a design determination command, the process moves to step E328.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable production is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E328, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process moves to step E329, and if it is not a special game system designation command, this command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small winning opening designation command, a small winning ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing in step E329. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big win game or the small win game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the round is performed. In the case of the specified command, the round effect of the round game is determined and the effect instruction command for executing the round effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the ending effect of the small winning game and executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

(Modified example of the main processing of the production control unit)
A modification of the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of main processing in the effect control section 130m. In this modified example, it is assumed that backup power is not supplied to the sub-RAM 130c and the game history information before the power failure is not taken over after the power is restored.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1a, performs CPU initialization such as internal register settings in step E2a, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3a.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4a, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5a. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted at step E6a.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number update process in step E7a. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control section 141. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt ), etc., and permits all interrupts in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the image display device (the first image display device 70, the second It performs processing for adjusting the amount of light (value) of the backlight of the two-image display device 71) and for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the sound volume and the amount of light. Details of the adjustment mode switching process will be described later.

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs the perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound. Details of the volume adjustment process will be described later.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the image display device (first image A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

It should be noted that not only the light intensity of the backlight of the image display device (first image display device 70 and second image display device 71) is adjusted, but also the light intensity of the LEDs provided in the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 is adjusted. may also be adjusted together.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode that reduces power consumption by lowering the amount of backlight of the image display devices (the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71). .

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c to indicate that it is time to update the display image of the image display device. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set by V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141, which will be described later. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to a scene switching counter, a wait frame counter, and a frame counter which are updated in the V blank interrupt process, which will be described later, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer to the image display device. Processing for displaying on (first image display device, second image display device 71) is performed.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit)
The command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a). FIG. 57(a) is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. FIG. This command reception interruption process is executed by receiving various commands transmitted from the effect control section 130m.

First, the overall CPU 141a performs command reception processing in step T30. Specifically, when receiving an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, a process of storing it in the reception buffer of the general RAM 141c is performed. When this process ends, the current command reception interrupt process ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit)
V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(b). FIG. 57(b) is a flow chart showing V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. As shown in FIG. This V-blank interrupt processing is executed each time a V-blank signal is received from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every time the display of one frame of effect image is completed (approximately 33 milliseconds).

First, the supervising CPU 141a performs counter update processing in step T50. Specifically, a process of +1 updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) used in the above-described animation control process or the like is performed.

The supervising CPU 141a performs frame buffer switching command processing in step T51. Specifically, the image control unit 145 (VDP) is instructed to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM. As a result, every time V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 milliseconds), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer." Buffer" and alternately.

In step T52, the supervising CPU 141a sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched in a predetermined area of the supervising RAM 141c, and terminates the current V-blank interrupt processing. This frame switching flag is referred to in step T11 of the main processing of the overall control section 141. FIG.

(Adjustment mode switching process of integrated control unit)
The adjustment mode switching process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing adjustment mode switching processing of the integrated control unit 141 .

First, in step T4-1, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not an adjustment mode related to adjustment of the sound volume and the amount of light has been set in the supervising RAM 141c. If the adjustment mode has not been set (this process is executed first after the power is turned on), the process proceeds to step T4-3, and if the adjustment mode has been set, the process proceeds to step T4-2. Transfer.

The supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the state of the switch 22 has changed in step T4-2. Specifically, the current state of the changeover switch 22 is compared with the previous state of the changeover switch 22 stored in the general RAM 141c at step T4-5, which will be described later. If there is a change in the state of the change-over switch 22, the adjustment mode is set, and the process is shifted to step T4-3; if there is no change in the state of the change-over switch 22, the adjustment mode is not set. to end the current adjustment mode switching process.

The supervising CPU 141a selects the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59(b) at step T4-3, and at step T4-4, adjusts the adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16) corresponding to the switch position of the switch 22, selects the reference Information and the power saving mode (ON, OFF) are specified and set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. The reference information includes whether or not the sound volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19, the adjustment range of the volume value in volume adjustment, the initial value of the volume value of the sound effect, and the backlight of the image display device using the cross key 19. , the adjustment range of the light amount value in the light amount adjustment, and the initial value of the light amount value of the backlight.

In step T4-5, the general CPU 141a sets the current state (switch position) of the switch 22 in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c, and terminates the current adjustment mode switching process. The state of the switch 22 set here is referred to in step T4-2.

(Switch and adjustment mode selection table)
The switch 22 and the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 59(a) is a diagram showing the appearance of the changeover switch 22, and FIG. 59(b) is a diagram showing an adjustment mode selection table.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the changeover switch 22 has a switch body 22a having a plurality of (for example, 16) selection terminals inside, and is rotatably (360 degrees) pivotally supported with respect to the switch body 22a. By rotating the operation part 22b, the selection terminal to which the common terminal of the operation part 22b is connected is changed and the switch is switched (switch position is changed). do).

In addition, 16 scales (0 to F) are provided on the upper surface of the switch body 22a to indicate the position (contact) of the selection terminal to which the common terminal is connected, and the common terminal is connected to the operating portion 22b. Arrows are provided to indicate selection terminals. Therefore, the state of the switch (switch position) can be grasped from the scale of the switch body 22a and the arrow of the operation portion 22b.

The changeover switch 22 may be composed of a slide switch that opens and closes a contact by linearly sliding an operation portion, or a dip switch or the like that changes a contact by operating any one of a plurality of operation portions. It may be configured by

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the adjustment mode selection table contains switch positions (0 to F) of the changeover switch 22, adjustment modes (modes 1 to 16), and reference information (whether volume adjustment is possible, volume value adjustment). range, volume initial value, light intensity adjustment availability, light intensity value adjustment range, light intensity initial value) and power saving mode settings are associated with each other.

For example, when the switch position of the selector switch 22 is "1", the adjustment mode is set to "mode 2", the volume adjustment availability is set to "possible (variable)", and the volume value adjustment range is set to "1 to "5" is set, "1" is set as the volume initial value, "possible (variable)" is set as the light intensity adjustment possibility, "1 to 5" is set as the light intensity value adjustment range, and " 1” is set, and “OFF” is set as the power saving mode.

The first feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59(b) is that in adjustment modes 1 to 6 where the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is in the range of 0 to 5, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible (variable). In adjustment modes 7 to 11 where the switch position is set in the range of 6 to A, the volume can be adjusted (variable) but the light amount cannot be adjusted (fixed), and the switch position is in the range of B to F. Adjustment mode 12. 16, the volume cannot be adjusted (fixed), but the amount of light can be adjusted (variable). By doing so, it becomes possible to select (set) whether or not to adjust the volume and the amount of light by roughly operating the changeover switch 22, which improves the convenience of the operation by the game clerk.

A second feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59B is that the volume initial value and the light intensity initial value are set by switching the adjustment mode by operating the switch 22 . By doing so, it becomes possible to adjust the volume (value) and the amount of light (value) by operating the changeover switch 22, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk.

A third feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. The power saving (eco) mode is set to ON, and it is possible to set ON/OFF of the power saving mode by operating the selector switch 22 . By doing so, it is possible to set whether the power saving mode is turned ON or OFF according to the intention of the game parlor side, and it becomes possible to control the power consumption of the game machine 1 to some extent. Therefore, it is also possible to adjust the operating costs of the entire amusement arcade.

(Circuit configuration of voice control unit)
A circuit configuration centering on the audio control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration centering on the audio control section 148. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 60, the audio control unit 148 includes an integrated control unit 141 that outputs various audio control commands related to audio output to the audio control unit 148, and various audio data (effect sound, system sound). A voice ROM 149 or the like that stores data is connected.

The audio control unit 148 includes a control unit 148a that outputs audio data based on the audio control command transmitted from the overall control unit 141 and an output control command related to volume (decoding unit control command, volume control command, etc.); A plurality of audio channels (ch0 to ch39) to which output control commands output from 148a are input, a mixer 148d for mixing and outputting audio signals output from each of the plurality of audio channels, and a mixer 148d for outputting from the mixer 148d. An audio signal processing unit 148e that performs predetermined audio processing (equalization, effect processing, panning, looping, etc.) on the received signal, an operational amplifier 148f as an amplifier, and a digital audio signal that converts to an analog signal. and a D/A converter 148g for outputting to the audio output device 9 .

The plurality of audio channels include a fixed channel group in which a plurality of fixed channels used for outputting notification sounds are set, and a variable channel group in which a plurality of variable channels used for outputting effect sounds are set. , decoding units 148b0 to 148b39 that perform processing (reading/decompression of audio data from the audio ROM 149, playback start, playback pause, playback end) according to the input decoding unit control command, and an input volume control command Each has a channel volume control unit that performs processing (output volume setting, fade-in, fade-out) according to the

The decoding unit contains "playback status (playing, waiting)" that indicates whether or not audio is being played on the audio channel, and "priority (high, medium)" that indicates the priority of audio being played on the audio channel. , low)”, and “sound number”, which is a number for identifying the sound to be played/played.

In the channel volume control section, "Volume" is the output volume (percentage of the maximum volume) of the audio currently playing on the audio channel, and whether the audio currently playing on the audio channel is set to fade in/fade out. status information such as "fade status", which is information on whether or not they are completed or not.

Therefore, the control unit 148a periodically acquires the status information from the audio channel decoding unit and the channel volume control unit, so that it is possible to always grasp the processing status of these audio channels.

The audio ROM 149 stores a plurality of audio data (phrase data) such as background sounds (BGM), effect sounds, notification sounds, etc. used in the gaming machine as compressed digital data. As a method for compressing the audio data, for example, a modified discrete cosine transform or the like can be used, but the method is not limited to this, and the audio data does not have to be compressed.

(Audio channel configuration)
The configuration of the audio channels of the audio control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the configuration of the audio channels of the audio control section 148. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61, among the plurality of audio channels (0ch to 39ch) provided in the audio control unit 148, six audio channels 0ch to 5ch are fixed channels that are fixed to use the notification sound. , is disabled for directing sound. On the other hand, the 34 audio channels 6ch to 39ch are variable channels used for the sound effect, and when outputting the effect sound, the control unit 148a selects the vacant sound channel from the sound channels 6ch to 39ch. is selected and used to reproduce audio data instructed by the integrated control unit 141 .

In this way, a plurality of audio channels are distinguished into fixed channels for notification sounds and variable channels for effect sounds. In this case, by muting or stopping the effect sound output from the variable channel, the notification sound can be easily output preferentially. Therefore, there is no need to be aware of which channel is outputting the effect sound, and the audio channels can be used efficiently.

(Voice management table)
The voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 shows a voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 62, the audio management table contains the tone number of audio data, the type of audio data, the output format of audio data (stereo, monaural), the priority of audio data, and the output volume of audio data. It is associated, and the explanation of the system sound is described as a reference.

The sound numbers "1" to "12" are notification sounds related to the security of the game machine 1, the output format is "monaural", and the priority is set to one of "high", "medium" and "low". Some are output at a fixed volume (MAX volume corresponding to the volume value "5") and some are output depending on the volume value.
The sound numbers "13" to "100" are effect sounds related to the effect on the gaming machine 1, the output format is "monaural" or "stereo", the priority is set to "low", and the volume is Output with a volume dependent on the value.
The sound numbers "101" to "105" are notification sounds related to the volume after adjustment, the output format is "monaural", the priority is set to "low", and the volume depends on the volume value. output.

"Power-on notification sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c (payment RAM 121c) is initialized (setting change, RWM clear). ).
The “power recovery notification sound” is a notification sound (error sound) that is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when power is restored from a power failure.
The “unrecoverable error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the power is turned off when an unrecoverable error that stops the progress of the game occurs on the main control board 110 .
The "unauthorized winning error sound" is generated when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 when the auxiliary game is not in progress, or when a game ball enters the big winning port when the special game (jackpot game, small win game) is not in progress. This is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the power is turned off when an illegal prize winning error such as a winning error occurs.
"Abnormal prize winning error sound" is output until the power is turned off when an abnormal prize winning error occurs when the number of game balls that have entered the various prize openings does not match the number of game balls that are discharged from the winning ball channel that flows down the winning balls. This is a notification sound (error sound).

"Magnetic error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when a magnetic error that detects an abnormal magnetic force occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 55a.
The "radio wave error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when a radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave occurs in the radio wave detection sensor 56a.
"Door open error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output over the open period when a door open error that detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 by the open detection switch 31a occurs. is.
The "setting key switch error sound" is generated when a setting key error occurs in which the setting key switch 112a turns from the OFF state to the ON state while the progress of the game is being controlled, and the setting key switch 112a turns OFF again. This is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the
The "clear switch error sound" is a notification that is output for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when a clear switch error occurs in which the RWM clear switch 111a is operated while the progress of the game is being controlled. It is a sound (error sound).
The ``dish full error sound'' is output over a period of time when the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls when a full plate error occurs. This is a notification sound (error sound).
"Right-handed error sound" is a period in which right-handed hitting aimed at the right game area should not be performed (for example, normal game state). Sometimes, it is a notification sound (error sound) that is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

Note that the notification sound is prioritized according to the degree of importance of the security abnormality (error), and is set such that the abnormality that is more likely to lead to fraudulent activity has a higher priority. Therefore, when a plurality of security anomalies with different priorities occur at the same time, control is performed so that only one notification sound with a higher priority can be heard. For example, if a magnetic error with sound number "6" occurs when a door open error sound with sound number "8" is being output, the door open error sound with sound number "8" is muted to an inaudible sound ( mute) and output a magnetic error sound. When the output period of the magnetic error sound has passed, the output of the magnetic error sound is stopped, and if the output period of the door open error has not passed, the volume of the door open error sound is restored to the volume before silencing. It's becoming

Therefore, even if a security error (error) occurs with a low-priority sound number while a high-priority sound number is being output, the low-priority sound number will not be output. become. Also, when a security abnormality (error) with the same priority occurs, an alarm sound corresponding to the security abnormality (error) that occurred later is output.

Also, during the output of production sound (BGM, etc.) and volume information sound at an audible volume, the output volume is set to a fixed volume (volume value "5") and the priority is "high" or "medium" , the current volume value saved in the volume value area of the overall RAM 141c is saved in the save area of the overall RAM 141c, and then the current volume value is changed to the non-audible volume " 0” and outputting a volume change command to the audio control unit 148, the effect sound (BGM, etc.) and the volume notification sound are output at a non-audible volume.

In addition, during the output of the production sound (BGM, etc.) and the volume notification sound at a non-audible volume, the output volume is set to a fixed volume (volume value “5”) and the priority is “high” or “medium” When outputting the sound is finished, the volume value saved in the save area of the general RAM 141c is returned to the volume value area, and a volume change command is output to the audio control unit 148 to produce a sound effect (BGM, etc.). and volume notification sounds are output at the original volume. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game clerk and the player to hear the notification sound.

(Volume adjustment processing of the integrated control unit)
Volume adjustment processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing volume adjustment processing of the overall control unit 141 .

First, in step T5-1, the general CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment propriety set in the general RAM 141c is possible (variable). If it is possible to adjust the volume, the process proceeds to step T5-2, and if it is not possible (impossible) to adjust the volume, it is assumed that the volume cannot be adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19, and step T5. -19 is processed.

In step T5-2, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not a notification sound for a security abnormality with a priority of "medium" or higher is being output. If a security abnormality warning sound with a priority of "medium" or higher is being output, it is assumed that the sound volume cannot be adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19, and the process proceeds to step T5-19, where the priority is "medium". If the alarm sound for security abnormality is not being output, the process proceeds to step T5-3.

In step T5-3, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it is during the volume adjustable period. Specifically, during the customer waiting state and during the variable effect, the volume can be adjusted, and during the light amount adjustment, the volume cannot be adjusted. If it is during the volume adjustable period, it is assumed that the volume can be adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19, and the process proceeds to step T5-4. The process proceeds to step T5-19 assuming that the volume cannot be adjusted based on the above.

The supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have been operated in step T5-4. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input of an operation signal from the cross key detection switch 19a. If the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have been operated, the process proceeds to step T5-10, and if the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have not been operated, the process proceeds to step T5-5.

In step T5-5, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it is currently in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols and special games (big win game, small win game) are not being executed. If it is in the customer waiting state, the process moves to step T5-6, and if it is not in the customer waiting state, the process moves to step T5-15.

In step T5-6, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the non-display of the volume-related image, which will be described later, has continued for five seconds during the customer waiting state. If the non-display of the volume-related image continues for five seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-7, and if the non-display of the volume-related image does not continue for five seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-8. Transfer.

The "volume related image" includes a volume adjustment guide image for guiding that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19, and a volume adjustment guide image that notifies the current volume value and indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19. It is an image during volume adjustment for guiding that the value is adjusted.

In step T5-7, the general CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the volume adjustment guide image in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for displaying the volume adjustment guide image on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71).

In step T5-8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the cross key 19 has not been operated for 20 minutes during the customer waiting state. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 20 minutes, it is assumed that it cannot be determined whether the previous player has finished the game, and the process proceeds to step T5-15. If the game continues for 20 minutes, the current volume value is reset to the initial volume value set in the overall RAM 141c, assuming that the previous player has finished the game in step T5-9.

In step T5-10, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment guidance image is being displayed. If the volume adjustment guidance image is being displayed, the process is shifted to step T5-14 to switch to the volume adjustment in-progress image, and if the volume adjustment guidance image is not being displayed, the process is shifted to step T5-11. .

In step T5-11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjusting image is being displayed. If the image during volume adjustment is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-12 assuming that the volume is to be adjusted, and if the image during volume adjustment is not being displayed, step T5-12 is performed to display the volume adjustment guide image. Processing is transferred to T5-14.

In step T5-12, the supervising CPU 141a performs volume change processing for changing the volume value. Specifically, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, if the volume value stored in the general RAM 141c is not the lower limit value, 1 is subtracted from the volume value, and the right button of the cross key 19 is operated. If there is, the volume value is incremented by 1 if it is not the upper limit of the volume value stored in the general RAM 141c, and a volume change flag is set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the presence or absence of the volume change flag is referenced in the above-described audio control processing, a volume change command is output to the audio control unit 148, and the volume of the effect sound being output is changed.

In step T5-13, the general CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the volume notification sound corresponding to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. As a result, the audio control unit 148 performs processing for outputting a volume notification sound from the audio output device 9 according to the current volume value.

In step T5-14, the general CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the image during volume adjustment corresponding to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 displays the image during volume adjustment (instead of the volume adjustment guide image when the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed) on the image display device (first image display device 70 or second image display device). 71) will be processed for display. When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

In step T5-15, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjusting image is being displayed. If the volume adjusting image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-16 to determine whether or not the conditions for erasing the volume adjusting image are satisfied, and the volume adjusting image is displayed. If not, the current volume adjustment process is terminated.

The supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the production button 17 is operated in step T5-16. If the effect button 17 is operated, the process moves to step T5-18, and if the effect button 17 is not operated, the process moves to step T5-17.

In step T5-17, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-18, and if the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds, the image during volume adjustment is not erased. End the current volume adjustment process.

In step T5-18, the general CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the image during volume adjustment set in the general RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for erasing the image during volume adjustment displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71). When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

In step T5-19, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not a volume-related image (volume adjustment guidance image, volume adjustment in-progress image) is being displayed. If the volume-related image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-20, and if the volume-related image is not being displayed, the current volume adjustment process is terminated.

In step T5-20, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume related images (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjusting image) set in the supervising RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for erasing the volume-related image displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device). When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

In the present embodiment, the description of the light amount adjustment process is omitted, but although it differs from the sound volume adjustment process in that whether or not a notification sound is output after changing the light amount value, the basic process flow is are the same, it suffices to replace "volume" and "light intensity" in the volume adjustment process.

(Concrete example when the volume is adjusted while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 64, a specific example of volume adjustment during the customer waiting state will be described. It should be noted that the basic flow is the same when light amount adjustment is performed.

Here, the switch position (scale) of the selector switch 22 is "2", and the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position "2" are set in the overall RAM 144, and the volume value is set to "2". It is assumed that "2 (volume 40%)" is set and the light amount value is set to "3 (light amount 80%)".

At this time, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are valid during the valid period for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and the first image display device 70 is powered on. "135", which is the initial effect pattern 70a at the time of insertion, is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are also displayed.

After that, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled and the period shifts to a period in which the volume can be adjusted (under volume adjustment). At this time, as shown in FIG. 64(b), at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70, a volume adjusting image OG corresponding to the current volume value "2" is displayed.

When the left button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is decremented by 1 to become "1". At this time, as shown in FIG. 64(c), the volume adjusting image OG that has already been displayed is updated to the volume adjusting image OG corresponding to the subtracted volume value "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs The volume notification sound “do” corresponding to the volume value “1” is output at a volume of 20% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”.

After that, when the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period during which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment) ends, and the effective period for adjusting the volume and the amount of light is entered. At this time, if the sound volume adjusting image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased, and if the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is not operated for five seconds, the display is changed as shown in FIG. 64(d). , a volume adjustment guide image OAG and a light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

When 30 seconds have passed since the last operation of the effect button 17 or cross key 19, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 64(e), a customer waiting effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and BGM (customer waiting effect sound) corresponding to the customer waiting effect is output from the audio output device 9. is output.

As described above, when the volume adjusting image OG (light amount adjusting image) is not displayed, the operation of the cross key 19 does not change the volume value, and the volume adjusting image OG (light amount adjusting image) is displayed. Since the sound volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 when it is displayed, it is possible to adjust the sound volume (light quantity adjustment) after confirming the current sound volume value (light quantity value), thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

(Specific example when volume adjustment is performed during fluctuation production)
A specific example of the case where the volume adjustment is performed during the variable presentation will be described with reference to FIG. 65 . It should be noted that the basic flow is the same when light amount adjustment is performed.

Here, the switch position (scale) of the selector switch 22 is "2", and the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position "2" are set in the overall RAM 144, and the volume value is set to "2". It is assumed that "2 (volume 40%)" is set and the light amount value is set to "3 (light amount 80%)".

In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are valid during the valid period for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and the first image display device 70 has , "135", which is the initial effect pattern 70a when the power is turned on, is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are also displayed.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable performance is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the first image display device 70 starts scrolling the effect pattern 70a, and the audio output device 9 outputs the BGM corresponding to the variable effect to the volume value "2". It depends (corresponds) and outputs at a volume of 20%.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled and the period shifts to a period in which the volume can be adjusted (under volume adjustment). At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(c), a volume adjusting image OG corresponding to the current volume value "2" is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70. FIG.

When the right button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is incremented by 1 to become "3". At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(d), the volume adjusting image OG that has already been displayed is updated to the volume adjusting image OG corresponding to the added volume value "3", and is output from the audio output device 9. BGM is output at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "3".

After that, when the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period during which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment) ends, and the effective period for adjusting the volume and the amount of light is entered. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(e), the volume adjusting image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased.

In this way, by enabling the sound volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) by operating the cross key 19 even during execution of the variable performance, the convenience of the player is improved and the interest of the game is enhanced. becomes possible.

In addition, it is not possible to adjust the volume (light amount adjustment) at the start of the variable effect or at the end of the variable effect, but at the start of the variable effect or the end of the variable effect, the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) ) may be disabled. In that case, the image OG during volume adjustment (image during light amount adjustment) may be deleted, or only the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) may be disabled while it is displayed.

In addition, even during the execution of the variable effect, the volume adjustment image OG (light amount adjustment image) is not displayed, and the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is performed without displaying the volume adjustment image OG (light amount adjustment image). It may be made possible.

(Concrete example when settings are changed)
A specific example in which settings are changed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 66(1) to 66(4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the startup waiting process for other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation. The display device 64, the normal symbol reservation display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the startup waiting process is completed and the process shifts to the startup process. (no detection, error occurrence detection, etc.) is performed), and a setting change designation command is sent. Also, a setting changing signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113 .

Then, at the timing of T4, when it detects that the setting value confirmation operation has been performed, it transmits a power-on designation command to control the progress of the game (detection of winning of game balls, detection of error occurrence, etc.) ), and the process (updating the normal payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal out number counter) for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) is started.

At this time, the output of the power-on signal is started from the security signal terminal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds), and the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 , to display the initial pattern (for example, one of the plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit), which is a predetermined loss, and the first special symbol reservation display device 63 and the second special symbol reservation display device 64 becomes a display indicating that the special figure pending number is "0", and in the information display 113, lighting confirmation for all lighting of the 7 segment display is started.

After that, when it detects that it is in a customer waiting state at the timing of T5, it transmits a customer waiting state designation command, and at the timing of T6, when the execution time (5 seconds) of lighting confirmation has passed, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

Next, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7-T8, when the winning of game balls into the first starting port 45 is detected, the prize balls (three game balls) are paid out from the payout device 95. The normal middle payout number counter is updated, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "1", and the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning prize designation command Send a pre-change command such as

Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special figure reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special figure reservation number is "0", and the special to be stopped and displayed After determining the pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the first special symbol display device 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol. Start.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display unit 60 stops displaying the lost special symbol and transmits a symbol confirmation command, and at the timing of T12, when it is detected that the customer is waiting. , a customer waiting state specification command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66(1) and 67, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. 67(1-a) to (1-h) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67(1-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67(1-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the setting change mode for changing the setting and starts setting change notification. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67(1-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the power-on notification. At this time, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 light up in white, and the sound volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power-on notification is continued, and after the timing of T6, the timing of T7 is reached. , when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the sound output from the sound output device 9 stops. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the initial effect symbol "135", the background image, etc. (see FIG. 67(1-e)).

Then, at timing T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 has elapsed, the power-on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized.

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol reservation stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. Update number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first pending icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation performance is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable performance. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect pattern 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost performance pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 67(1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 66(2) and FIG. 67, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described. 67(2-a) to (2-h) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67(2-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67(2-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification is started and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67(2-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power-on notification that should be executed is not executed. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting changing screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67 (2-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized, and the sound volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-e)).

Then, at T9 timing after the timing of T6 to T8, when receiving a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of the first special figure pending that has been done. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first pending icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation performance is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable performance. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect pattern 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the lost effect pattern 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 67(2-h)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 66(3) and FIG. 67, an operation example 3 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. 67(3-a) to (3-h) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67(3-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven-color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (3-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification is started and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67 (3-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should be executed is not executed. Continue configuration change mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting changing screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67 (3-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state that should normally be shifted. to continue the configuration change mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting changing screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67(3-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, when receiving a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the sub RAM 130c The setting change mode is continued although the stored number of the first special figure pending is updated. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues, and the additional display of the first pending icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation production, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. When it is normally received, it shifts to a performance progression mode for performing game performance and starts variable performance. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decoration light emission for decorating the variable performance, and the operation of the cross key 19 It becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (3-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect pattern 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (3-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 67(3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 66 (4) and FIG. 67, the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are not received normally. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 67(4-a) to (4-h) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67(4-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67(4-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification is started and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting values are being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67(4-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should be executed is not executed. Continue configuration change mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting changing screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67(4-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state that should normally be shifted. to continue the configuration change mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting changing screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67(4-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, when receiving a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the sub RAM 130c The setting change mode is continued although the stored number of the first special figure pending is updated. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues, and the additional display of the first pending icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation production, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. When a reception error occurs due to failure of normal reception, the setting change mode is continued without executing the variable performance that should be executed. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting changing screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67(4-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the setting change mode is continued without deriving the result of the variable performance that should be deriving. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting changing screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67 (4-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to an effect progress mode for performing a game effect and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized, and the sound volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 67(4-h)).

In this way, during the period from when the effect control board 130 side enters the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period in which the sound volume can be adjusted by the game clerk, thereby improving the convenience of the game arcade.

In addition, after the effect control board 130 shifts to the setting change mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progress mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) can be normally executed. At the timing of reception, the setting change mode (screen during setting change) ends and shifts to the production progress mode (normal screen), so it is possible to shift the mode according to the change in the production control by the production control board 130. Become.

In addition, at the timing when the setting change mode (setting change screen) shifts to the production progress mode (production screen), it becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light amount by operating the cross key 19 (player). Therefore, it is possible to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light while actually confirming the effect, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function friendly to the player.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning ports (general winning port 43, first start port 45, second When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, the first big winning port 50 and the second big winning port 53), this winning becomes invalid and the game balls are not put out, and the payout corresponding to this winning is made. Since the normal base value displayed on the information display device 113 does not change because the numbers are not collected and are excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, the game machine can be operated only when the player is able to play the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device, when the game ball flows into the out port 39, this inflow is Since the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected and excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, the normal base value displayed on the information display device 113 does not change. It is possible to calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the game machine only when it is executable, and to provide accurate performance information.

In addition, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game ball wins in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53), this Winning is validated, game balls are put out, and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 changes as an object for calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the game machine even if it does not appear to be in the game progress mode (performance progress mode), and provide accurate performance information. becomes possible.

In addition, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device. When a game ball flows into the out port 39 when the game ball is running, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and displayed on the information display 113 as an object for the calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value that is displayed may change, even if it is not in the game progress mode (performance progress mode), it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine. It is possible to provide accurate performance information.

Also, when the main control board 110 is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are not executed (error designation commands are sent). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (effect screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are made. Execution (an error designation command is sent) and an error notification can be executed, so that wasteful processing is not performed in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player will play a game or cheat during a setting change process. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device. When there is, various error judgments are executed (error designation command is sent) and error notification is executed, so even if it does not appear to be game progress mode (production progress mode), an error occurs. can be accurately notified. In this case, the display of the screen during setting change may be terminated by transitioning to the effect progress mode, or the display of the screen during setting change may be maintained without shifting to the effect progress mode.

When the setting change mode (setting change screen) shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), even if the power-on notification is being executed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (by operating the cross key 19 (player)). setting) may be enabled, but at the timing when the output of the power-on notification sound is completed, the sound volume and light amount may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19, or the power-on notification may be set. is completed, the sound volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 .

In addition, even if a special pattern memory designation command or a start winning prize designation command as a pre-variation command is normally received during the setting change mode, instead of shifting to the production progress mode, the special pattern memory designation command or the start It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the winning designation command is normally received.

Also, even if the pattern confirmation command is normally received during the setting change mode, the transition to the production progress mode may not be made, but the production progress mode may be shifted to at the timing when the pattern confirmation command is normally received. good. In addition, information indicating the determination result of the special design determination may be included in the design determination command, and in this case, the performance design indicating the determination result of the special design determination (for example, "777" if the big hit, "246" if the loss ), it is preferable to display the common initial effect symbol “135” when the power is turned on (low-probability short-time gaming state).

In addition, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is normally received, the production progress mode is shifted to the normal screen (production screen ) is displayed (starting the variable effect), the variable display of the special symbols may be performed while the setting change mode is continued and the setting change screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (drawing screen).

Also, the luminous colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device in the setting change notification may be different from the luminous colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device in the power-on notification. By doing so, it becomes easy to recognize which of the setting change notification and the power-on notification is being performed.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. In the case of execution, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is sent, the image display device maintains the setting change notification and regulates (restricts) the error notification. It is preferable to set the priority (importance) of the error notification lower than that of the setting change notification.

(Concrete example when RWM clear is performed)
A specific example in which RWM is cleared when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. Figure 68 (1) ~ (4) is a diagram showing four operation examples of the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the startup waiting process for other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation. The display device 64, the normal symbol reservation display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the startup waiting process ends and the process shifts to the startup process. At the timing of T3, when it is detected that the RWM clear operation has been performed, a predetermined area in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized. (no game ball win detection, error occurrence detection, etc.) is shifted to the RWM clear mode, and an RWM clear designation command is transmitted. In addition, the RWM clearing signal is output from the security signal terminal.

Then, at the timing of T4, when it is detected that the RWM clear confirmation operation has been performed, a power-on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (detection of winning of game balls, detection of error occurrence, etc.) ), and the process (updating the normal payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal out number counter) for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) is started.

At this time, the output of the power-on signal is started from the security signal terminal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds), and the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 , to display a predetermined initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of the plurality of LEDs constituting the display lights up), a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64 and the normal symbol reservation indicator 65 become a display indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0", and the information indicator 113 starts lighting confirmation to light up all the 7 segment indicators.

After that, when it detects that it is in a customer waiting state at the timing of T5, it transmits a customer waiting state designation command, and at the timing of T6, when the execution time (5 seconds) of lighting confirmation has passed, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

Next, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7-T8, when the winning of game balls into the first starting port 45 is detected, the prize balls (three game balls) are paid out from the payout device 95. The normal middle payout number counter is updated, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "1", and the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning prize designation command Send a pre-change command such as

Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special figure reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special figure reservation number is "0", and the special to be stopped and displayed After determining the pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the first special symbol display device 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol. Start.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display unit 60 stops displaying the lost special symbol and transmits a symbol confirmation command, and at the timing of T12, when it is detected that the customer is waiting. , a customer waiting state specification command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 68(1) and FIG. 69, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. 69(1-a) to (1-h) correspond to FIGS. 68(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69(1-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven-color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 69(1-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is shifted to perform the RWM clear and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69(1-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the power-on notification. At this time, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 light up in white, and the sound volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power-on notification is continued, and after the timing of T6, the timing of T7 is reached. , when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the sound output from the sound output device 9 stops. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the initial effect symbol "135" and the background image (see FIG. 69 (1-e)).

Then, at timing T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 has elapsed, the power-on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized.

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol reservation stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. Update number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first pending icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation performance is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable performance. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect pattern 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 69(1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 68(2) and FIG. 69, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described. 69(2-a) to (2-h) correspond to FIGS. 68(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69(2-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (2-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is shifted to perform the RWM clear and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69(2-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the power-on notification that should have been executed is not executed. . At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the clear confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 69 (2-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized, and the sound volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-e)).

Then, at T9 timing after the timing of T6 to T8, when receiving a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of the first special figure pending that has been done. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first pending icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation performance is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable performance. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect pattern 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the lost effect pattern 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 67(2-h)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 68(3) and FIG. 69, an operation example 3 on the production control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. 69(3-a) to (3-h) correspond to FIGS. 68(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69(3-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (3-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is shifted to perform the RWM clear and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (3-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should be executed is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the clear confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 69 (3-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state that should normally be shifted. continue the RWM clear mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the clear confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 69 (3-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, when receiving a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the sub RAM 130c The number of the first special figure pending stored is updated, but the RWM clear mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues, and the additional display of the first pending icon is not performed.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the variation performance, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command. is normally received, a transition is made to a performance progress mode for performing a game performance, and a variable performance is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decoration light emission for decorating the variable performance, and the operation of the cross key 19 It becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (3-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost performance symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (3-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the lost effect pattern 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 69 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 68 (4) and FIG. 69, the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are not received normally. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 69(4-a) to (4-h) correspond to FIGS. 68(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69(4-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven-color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (4-b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is shifted to perform the RWM clear and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69(4-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should be executed is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the clear confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 69 (4-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state that should normally be shifted. continue the RWM clear mode. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the clear confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 69(4-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, when receiving a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the sub RAM 130c The number of the first special figure pending stored is updated, but the RWM clear mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first pending icon is not performed.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the variation performance, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command. cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs, the RWM clear mode is continued without executing the variation performance that should be executed. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 69(4-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the RWM clear mode is continued without deriving the result of the variable performance that should be deriving. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 69 (4-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to an effect progress mode for performing a game effect and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized, and the sound volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 69 (4-h)).

In this way, during the period from when the effect control board 130 side enters the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period in which the sound volume can be adjusted by the game clerk, thereby improving the convenience of the game arcade.

In addition, after the effect control board 130 shifts to the RWM clear mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progression mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) is normally executed. At the timing of reception, the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) ends and shifts to the production progress mode (normal screen), so it is possible to perform mode shift in accordance with changes in production control by the production control board 130. .

Also, at the timing when the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) shifts to the production progress mode (normal screen), it becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light amount by operating the cross key 19 (player). It is possible to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light while actually confirming the performance, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function friendly to the player.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning ports (general winning port 43, first start port 45, second When a game ball wins in the starting port 47, the first big winning port 50, or the second big winning port 53), the winning is invalidated and the game balls are not paid out, and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning is made. is not collected and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 is not subject to calculation of the normal base value. Information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, when the main control board 110 is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the game ball flows into the out port 39 while the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, this inflow is invalidated. , the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected and is excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change. It is possible to calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the game machine only when possible, and to provide accurate performance information.

Also, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game ball wins in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53), this winning is activated, game balls are paid out, and the number of payouts corresponding to the wins is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 is subject to calculation, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 may change. To provide accurate performance information by accurately calculating, storing, and displaying the performance information (history information) of the game machine even if the game machine does not appear to be in a game progress mode (performance progress mode). becomes possible.

Also, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When a game ball flows into the out port 39 when the game ball is in, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and displayed on the information display 113 as an object for the calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value may change, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the game machine even if it does not appear to be in the game progress mode (performance progress mode). , it is possible to provide accurate performance information.

Also, when the main control board 110 side is in RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are not executed (error designation command is sent). When the error notification is not executed, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the normal screen (effect screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are executed. (an error designation command is transmitted) and the error notification can be executed, so it is difficult to assume that the player will play a game or cheat during the RWM clearing process, without performing useless processing. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) because the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. At times, various error judgments are executed (an error designation command is sent) and an error notification is executed, so even if it does not appear to be in the game progress mode (production progress mode), an error will not occur. Accurate notification is possible. In this case, the display of the clear confirmation screen may be terminated by transitioning to the production progress mode, or the display of the clear confirmation screen may be maintained without shifting to the production progress mode.

When the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) shifts to the production progress mode (normal screen), even if the power-on notification is executed, the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player). ) can be set, instead of setting the sound volume and light intensity by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power-on notification sound is completed, the power-on notification can be set. At the timing when the operation is completed, the cross key 19 may be operated to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light.

In addition, even if a special symbol memory designation command or a start opening prize designation command as a pre-variation command is normally received during the RWM clear mode, the special symbol memory designation command or the starting prize designation command is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode. It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the winning designation command is normally received.

Also, even if the pattern confirmation command is normally received during the RWM clear mode, the transition to the production progress mode may not be made, but the production progress mode may be shifted to at the timing when the pattern confirmation command is normally received. good.

In addition, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is normally received, the production progress mode is shifted to the normal screen (production screen ) (starting the variable performance), the RWM clear mode may be continued and the variable display of the special symbols may be performed while the clear confirmation screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (drawing screen).

Also, the luminous color of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in the RWM clear preparation notification may be different from the luminous color of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in the power-on notification. . By doing so, it becomes easy to recognize which of the RWM clear preparation notification and the power-on notification is being performed.

Also, when the main control board 110 side is in RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) In this case, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is sent, the RWM clear preparation notification is maintained in the image display device so that the error notification is regulated (restricted). , the priority (importance) of the error notification should be set lower than that of the RWM clear preparation notification.

(Specific example of when game control state is restored)
A specific example in which the control state of the game is restored without confirming the settings when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. Figure 70 (1) ~ (4) is a diagram showing four operation examples of the effect control board 130 side. In addition, it shall be restored to the low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state) here.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, with reference to FIG. 70, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the startup waiting process for other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation. The display device 64, the normal symbol reservation display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the startup waiting process ends and shifts to the startup process. At the timing of T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation are not performed, the power supply Transfer to the game progress mode for transmitting a recovery designation command to control the progress of the game, and processing for calculating performance information (history information such as normal base value) (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter , update of the number of outs counter during normal).

At this time, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 display initial symbols (for example, a plurality of one of the LED lights up), and the first special symbol reservation indicator 63, the second special symbol reservation indicator 64, and the normal symbol reservation indicator 65 are the special figure reservation number "0" is displayed, and the information display 113 starts lighting confirmation for lighting all the 7-segment displays.

Then, at the timing of T4, when it detects that it is in a customer waiting state, it transmits a customer waiting state designation command, and at the timing of T5, when the execution time (5 seconds) of lighting confirmation has passed, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

After that, at the timing of T8 after the timing of T6-T7, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is detected, the prize balls (three game balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 and normally The medium payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "1", such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning prize designation command. Send pre-change command.

Next, at the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special figure reservation number is "0", and the special to be stopped and displayed After determining the pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the first special symbol display device 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol. Start.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the fluctuation time elapses, the losing special symbol is displayed stop on the first special symbol display device 60, the symbol determination command is transmitted, and at the timing of T11, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70(1) and 71. FIG. 71(1-a) to (1-h) correspond to FIGS. 70(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71(1-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the game production is shifted to the production progress mode for performing the game production, and the power supply restoration notification is started. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a power restoration notification sound, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 light up in white, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, a power restoration screen indicating that the power has been restored is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71 (1-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power recovery notification is continued. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the display of the power recovery screen continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(1-c)).

Next, at timing T6 after timing T5, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses, the sound output from the sound output device 9 stops. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 has passed, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, the first image display device 70 displays the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG in addition to the initial effect pattern and the background image (see FIG. 71 (1-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol reservation stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. Update number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first pending icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation performance is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable performance. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost performance symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost performance pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 71 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 70(2) and FIG. 71, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described. 71(2-a) to (2-h) correspond to FIGS. 70(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (2-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the power restoration notification that should have been executed is not executed. . Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(2-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the mode is shifted to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect, and the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 71 (2-c)).

Next, at timing T6 after timing T5, the first image display device 70 enters a state in which the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect pattern and the background image (Fig. 71(2-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7, when the waiting time for the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, a demonstration BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 start demonstrating decorative light emission for attracting the player's interest. Then, on the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the player's interest is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 71 (2-e )reference).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol reservation stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. The number is updated and the customer waiting presentation is terminated. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect symbol "135", the background image, etc., and additionally displays the first pending icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation performance is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable performance. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost performance symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (2-g)).

At the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the lost effect pattern 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 71 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 of production control board)
Next, using FIG. 70(3) and FIG. 71, an operation example 3 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. 71(3-a) to (3-h) correspond to FIGS. 70(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (3-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the power restoration notification that should have been executed is not executed. . Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(3-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the state does not shift to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. continue waiting for commands. Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(3-c)).

Since no command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T5 to T7, the command waiting state is continued. Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIGS. 71(3-d) and 71(3-e)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number of pending commands, but continue waiting for commands. Therefore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information, and does not additionally display the first pending icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the variation production, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. When it is normally received, it shifts to a performance progression mode for performing game performance and starts variable performance. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decoration light emission for decorating the variable performance, and the operation of the cross key 19 It becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (3-f)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost performance symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (3-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost performance pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 71 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 70 (4) and FIG. 71, the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command can not be received normally Production An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 71(4-a) to (4-h) correspond to FIGS. 70(a) to (h), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven-color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (4-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the power restoration notification that should have been executed is not executed. . Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(4-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the state does not shift to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. continue waiting for commands. Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(4-c)).

Next, at the timing of T8 after passing the timing of T5 to T7, when receiving a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start winning prize designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the sub RAM 130c The number of the first special figure pending stored in is updated, but the command waiting state is continued. Therefore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information, and does not additionally display the first pending icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the variation production, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. If a reception error occurs due to failure of normal reception, the command waiting state is continued without execution of the variable performance that should be executed. Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(4-f)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without deriving the result of the variable performance that should be deriving. Then, the display of the color bar and the version information continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71(4-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the game effect is shifted to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect, and the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized, and the sound volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 71 (4-h)).

In this way, during the period from when the effect control board 130 side enters the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period in which the sound volume can be adjusted by the game clerk, thereby improving the convenience of the game arcade.

In addition, after the effect control board 130 shifts to the command waiting state, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progress mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) can be normally executed. At the timing of reception, the command waiting state (initial screen) is terminated and the mode shifts to the performance progress mode (normal screen), so that the mode shift can be performed according to the change of the performance control by the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

In addition, at the timing when the command waiting state (initial screen) shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), it becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light amount by operating the cross key 19 (player). It is possible to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light while confirming the effect directly, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function friendly to the player.

When the command waiting state (initial screen) shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), even if the power restoration notification is being executed, the volume and light amount are adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player). Instead of enabling the power restoration notification sound output, the sound volume and light intensity may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power restoration notification sound is completed, or the power restoration notification may be completed. At the end of the timing, the cross key 19 may be operated to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light.

In addition, even if a special symbol memory designation command or a start opening prize designation command as a pre-variation command is normally received during the command waiting state, the special symbol memory designation command or the start is not made not to shift to the production progress mode. It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the winning designation command is normally received.

Also, even if the pattern confirmation command is normally received during the command waiting state, the transition to the production progress mode may not be made, but the production progress mode may be shifted to at the timing when the pattern confirmation command is normally received. good.

(Concrete example when setting confirmation is performed)
A specific example in which setting confirmation is performed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. FIGS. 72(1) to 72(4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side. Here, it is assumed that the low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state) is restored after the setting is confirmed.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, with reference to FIG. 72, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the startup waiting process for other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation. The display device 64, the normal symbol reservation display device 65, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the startup waiting process ends and the process shifts to the startup process. At the timing of T3, when it is detected that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the setting values saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c are detected. The setting confirmation mode is entered to confirm the setting, and a setting confirmation specification command is sent. Also, a setting confirmation signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113 .

Then, at the timing of T4, when it is detected that the confirmation end operation has been performed, a power restoration designation command is sent to control the progress of the game (detection of winning of game balls, detection of error occurrence, etc. ) Transition to the game progress mode, and start processing (updating the normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter, and normal medium out number counter) for calculating performance information (history information such as normal base value).

At this time, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 display initial symbols (for example, a plurality of one of the LED lights up), and the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 and the second special symbol reservation indicator 64 are displayed to indicate that the special figure reservation number is "0", and the information display 113 Now, start checking the lighting to light up all the 7-segment displays.

After that, when it detects that it is in a customer waiting state at the timing of T5, it transmits a customer waiting state designation command, and at the timing of T6, when the execution time (5 seconds) of lighting confirmation has passed, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

After that, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7-T8, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is detected, the prize balls (three game balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 and normally The medium payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "1", such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning prize designation command. Send pre-change command.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special figure reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special figure reservation number is "0", and the special to be stopped and displayed After determining the pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a variation start command such as a special symbol designation command or a special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the first special symbol display device 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol. Start.

Next, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time elapses, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 to determine the symbol confirmation command, and at the timing of T12, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 72(1) and FIG. 73, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. 73(1-a) to (1-i) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven-color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 73(1-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is entered for setting confirmation, and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting-confirming screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73(1-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the game production is shifted to the production progress mode for performing the game production, and the power supply restoration notification is started. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a power restoration notification sound, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 light up in white, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, a power restoration screen indicating that the power has been restored is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (1-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power recovery notification is continued. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the display of the power recovery screen continues on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (1-d)).

Then, at timing T7 after timing T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses, the output of the sound from the sound output device 9 stops. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 has passed, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, the first image display device 70 displays the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG in addition to the initial effect pattern and the background image (see FIG. 73 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the pending count. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first pending icon.

Then, at the timing of T10, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (1-g)).

Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost performance symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-h)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when a customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost performance pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 73 (1-i)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 72(2) and FIG. 73, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described. 73(2-a) to (2-i) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73(2-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is entered for setting confirmation, and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting-confirming screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73(2-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power restoration notification that should be executed is not executed. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73(2-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to an effect progress mode for performing a game effect and enters a customer waiting state. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start light emitting for customer waiting decoration, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, and it is possible to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-d)).

Then, at timing T7 after timing T6, the first image display device 70 displays the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG in addition to the initial effect pattern and the background image ( See FIG. 73 (2-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the waiting time for the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, a demonstration BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 start demonstrating decoration light emission for attracting the player's interest. Then, in the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the player's interest is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 73 (2-f )reference).

Next, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol stored in the sub RAM 130c To end the customer waiting performance by updating the number of reservations. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect symbol "135", the background image, etc., and additionally displays the first pending icon.

Then, at the timing of T10, after normally receiving the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost performance symbol 70a temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-h)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when a customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 73 (2-i)).

(Operation example 3 of production control board)
Next, using FIGS. 72(3) and 73, an operation example 3 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. explain. 73(3-a) to (3-i) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . On the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with seven-color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (3-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is entered for setting confirmation, and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting-confirming screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73(3-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power restoration notification that should be executed is not executed. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73(3-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the system shifts to the customer waiting state that should normally be shifted. continue to configuration confirmation mode. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (3-d)).

Since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T6 to T8, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIGS. 73(3-e) to 73(3-f)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol reservation stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. Update the number but continue in configuration check mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first pending icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the variation production, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received, the game production is shifted to the production progress mode for performing the game production, and the variable production is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable performance is output from the audio output device 9, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable performance. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (3-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when receiving the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect pattern 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (3-h)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, customer waiting decorative light emission is started so that the customer waiting state can be easily recognized. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost performance pattern 70a, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 73 (3-i)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 72 (4) and FIG. 73, the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command can not be received normally Production An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. 73(4-a) to (4-i) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to (i), respectively.

First, at the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, start-up processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting the volume initial value). In addition, it is impossible to adjust (set) the sound volume or the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 . Then, the first image display device 70 becomes a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22 . The first image display device 70 displays version information indicating the contents of various ROMs together with seven color bars as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (4-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is entered for setting confirmation, and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting confirming screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73(4-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power restoration notification that should be executed is not executed. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board continue lighting in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73(4-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state which should normally be shifted. continue to configuration confirmation mode. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73 (4-d)).

Since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T6 to T8, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIGS. 73(4-e) to 73(4-f)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command and the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol reservation stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. Update the number but continue in configuration check mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first pending icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the variation production, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. When a reception error occurs due to failure of normal reception, the setting confirmation mode is continued without executing the variable performance that should be executed. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 71 (4-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without deriving the result of the variable performance that should be deriving. Then, the setting confirmation screen continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 73(4-h)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 74 for the board start light emitting for customer waiting decoration, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, and it is possible to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (production screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), the common initial production pattern “135” and power ON (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) ), the background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 73 (4-i)).

In this way, during the period from when the effect control board 130 side enters the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, it becomes possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period in which the sound volume can be adjusted by the game clerk, thereby improving the convenience of the game arcade.

Also, after the production control board 130 side shifts to the setting confirmation mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the production progress mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) can be normally executed. At the timing of reception, the setting confirmation mode (screen during setting confirmation) ends and shifts to the production progress mode (normal screen), so it is possible to shift the mode according to the change in production control by the production control board 130. Become.

Also, at the timing when the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), it becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light amount by operating the cross key 19 (player). It is possible to adjust (set) the sound volume and the amount of light while actually confirming the performance, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function friendly to the player.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first start opening 45, second opening) When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, the first big winning port 50 and the second big winning port 53), this winning becomes invalid and the game balls are not put out, and the payout corresponding to this winning is made. Since the normal base value displayed on the information display device 113 does not change because the numbers are not collected and are excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, the game machine can be operated only when the player is able to play the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, when the game ball flows into the out port 39, this inflow is Since the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected and excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, the normal base value displayed on the information display device 113 does not change. It is possible to calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the game machine only when it is executable, and to provide accurate performance information.

In addition, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power supply restoration designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game ball wins in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53), this Winning is validated, game balls are put out, and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 is changed as an object for calculation of the normal base value. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the game machine even if it does not appear to be in the game progress mode (performance progress mode), and provide accurate performance information. becomes possible.

In addition, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) because the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power supply restoration designation command, and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When a game ball flows into the out port 39 when the game ball is in, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and displayed on the information display 113 as an object for the calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value may change, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine even if it is not in the game progress mode (performance progress mode). performance information can be provided.

Also, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are not executed (an error designation command is transmitted). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (effect screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are made. Execution (error designation command is sent) and error notification can be executed, so that unnecessary processing is not performed in the situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play games or cheat during the setting confirmation process. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) because the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power supply restoration designation command, and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When there is, various error judgments are executed (error designation command is sent) and error notification is executed, so even if it does not appear to be game progress mode (production progress mode), an error occurs. can be accurately notified. In this case, the display of the setting-confirming screen may be terminated by transitioning to the effect progress mode, or the display of the setting-confirming screen may be maintained without transitioning to the effect progress mode.

When the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), even if the power restoration notification is executed, the volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (player) ( setting) can be set, but at the timing when the output of the power restoration notification sound is completed, the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19, or the power restoration notification can be set. is completed, the sound volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 .

In addition, even if a special symbol memory designation command or a start winning prize designation command as a pre-variation command is normally received during the setting confirmation mode, instead of moving to the production progress mode, the special symbol memory designation command or the start It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the winning designation command is normally received.

Also, even if the pattern confirmation command is normally received during the setting confirmation mode, the transition to the production progress mode may not be made, but the production progress mode may be entered at the timing when the pattern confirmation command is normally received. good.

In addition, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is normally received, the production progress mode is shifted to the normal screen (production screen ) is displayed (starting the variable effect), the variable display of the special symbols may be performed while the setting confirmation mode is continued and the setting confirmation screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (drawing screen).

Further, the luminous color of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device in the setting confirmation notification may be different from the luminous color of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device in the power recovery notification. By doing so, it becomes easy to recognize which of the setting confirmation notification and the power restoration notification is being performed.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation process), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. In the case of execution, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is sent, the image display device maintains the setting confirmation notification and regulates (restricts) the error notification. It is preferable to set the priority (importance) of the error notification lower than that of the setting confirmation notification.

In this embodiment, a game is played using a game medium such as a game ball, and a predetermined amount of game medium is given to the player as a prize when the giving condition is satisfied through the game. A game may be played using value data (game value) corresponding to , and a predetermined amount of value data (game value) may be given to the player as a prize when the giving condition is satisfied by the game.

(Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines are generally capable of providing game benefits (prize balls, prize medals, value data, etc.) according to the results of games. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116898). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, the gaming machine performance is predetermined, and there is a problem that the advantage of the game cannot be changed.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect control and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a game Specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal medium payouts) to calculate specific information (normal base value); 113), and transmission means for transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the effect control means and causing a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting changing screen) in response to the reception of the first control information, and the provision control means causes the setting change image to be displayed When a game medium (game ball, medal) wins in a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), the grant control is not performed due to the winning, and the specific information calculating means displays the setting change image. When the game medium wins in the winning area during the game, the specific information is not calculated due to the winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect control and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a game Specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal medium payouts) to calculate specific information (normal base value); 113), and transmission means for transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the effect control means and causing a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting changing screen) in response to the reception of the first control information, and the provision control means causes the setting change image to be displayed When a game medium (game ball, medal) wins in a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), the grant control is not performed due to the winning, and the specific information calculating means displays the setting change image. When the game medium wins in the winning area, the game information is not collected due to the winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect Effect control means (performance control board 130) for performing, and grant control means (payout control board 120 ), and the game control means includes setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) Winning determination means for determining whether or not a game medium (game ball, medal) has won a prize, and first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means when the setting change state is started. and the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. The game control means restricts the execution of the winning determination when the setting change state is under control, and enables the execution of the winning determination after the setting change state ends. there is By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); With the start of the setting change state, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and with the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is sent to the production control means ), wherein the effect control means displays a setting change image (screen during setting change) on a predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the first control information, and the second control information , and if the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change image is terminated even if the setting change state is terminated. It continues to display the changed image. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect control Effect control means (performance control board 130) for performing, and grant control means for performing grant control of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means, The game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a first control to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state Transmission means for transmitting information (setting change designation command) and transmitting second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and game information generated in the game (total out specific information calculating means for calculating specific information (normal base value) by collecting the number, the number of outs during normal, and the number of payouts during normal; and a display means, wherein the effect control means causes a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (screen during setting change) in response to the reception of the first control information, When the display of the setting change image is ended in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state has ended. The setting change image continues to be displayed even when the setting change image is displayed, and the grant control means is controlled to the setting change state and the prize area (various prize openings, various start openings) is displayed during the display of the setting change image. When a game medium (game ball, medal) wins a prize at the end of the setting change state, the game medium is placed in the prize area while the setting change image is being displayed, without performing the grant control due to the win. wins a prize, the awarding control is performed according to the prize, and the specific information calculation means adds the game medium to the prize area while the setting change image is being displayed while being controlled to the setting change state. is won, the specific information is not calculated due to the winning, and if the game medium wins in the winning area after the setting change state is over and the setting change image is being displayed, the The specific information is calculated according to the prize winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect Effect control means (performance control board 130) for performing, and grant control means (payout control board 120 ), the game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the production with the start of the setting change state transmitting means for transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to control means and transmitting second control information (power-on designation command) to said effect control means upon completion of said setting change state; Specific information calculation means for collecting generated game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal medium payouts) to calculate specific information (normal base value); ), and the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. ) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and if the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the setting The display of the setting change image is continued even after the change state has ended, and the provision control means controls the setting change image to be displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. When a game medium (game ball, medal) wins a prize in a game medium (game ball, medal, etc.), the award control is not performed due to the winning, and the setting change image is displayed after the setting change state is finished. When the game medium wins in the winning area, the awarding control is performed according to the winning, and the specific information calculating means performs the above-mentioned control when the setting change state is being controlled and during the display of the setting change image. When the game medium wins in the winning area, the game information is not collected due to the winning, and the game medium is placed in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed after the setting change state has ended. When winning, the game information is collected according to the winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect Effect control means (performance control board 130) for performing, and grant control means (payout control board 120 ), and the game control means includes setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) a winning determination means for executing a winning determination as to whether or not a game medium has won a prize in the above-mentioned setting; A transmission means for transmitting second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means with the end of the change state, and the effect control means receives the first control information. Displaying a setting change image (setting changing screen) on the display unit (first image display device 70), ending the display of the setting change image in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and displaying the setting change image When the second control information is not normally received in the above, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is terminated, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. The execution of the winning determination is restricted when the game is in the state of being changed, and the execution of the winning determination is enabled after the setting change state is ended. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); With the start of the setting change state, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and with the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is sent to the production control means ), and the effect control means includes a sound output unit for performing game effects based on the player's volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the (sound output device 9) to a predetermined volume, which is set to a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in accordance with the reception of the first control information. displaying a change image (screen during setting change), ending the display of the setting change image in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and disabling the volume setting while the setting change image is being displayed; After the setting change image is displayed, the volume can be set. By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); With the start of the setting change state, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and with the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is sent to the production control means ), and the effect control means includes a light emitting unit ( light quantity setting means for setting the light quantity of the effect light for emitting the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device to a predetermined light quantity; to display a setting change image (setting changing screen) on the display unit (first image display device 70) of, terminate the display of the setting change image in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and display the setting change image. The light amount cannot be set during display, and the light amount can be set after the setting change image is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect control and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); With the start of the setting change state, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and with the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is sent to the production control means ), and the effect control means includes a sound output unit for performing game effects based on the player's volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the (voice output device 9) to a predetermined volume and the light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player, the game is performed. light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for emitting the light emitting units (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the backlight of the image display device) for performing the effect to a predetermined light quantity; When the first control information is received, a setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70), and when the second control information is received, the setting change image is displayed. The display is ended, and the sound volume and the light amount cannot be set while the setting change image is displayed, and the sound volume and the light amount can be set after the setting change image is displayed. be. By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As the eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); With the start of the setting change state, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and with the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is sent to the production control means ), and the effect control means includes a sound output unit for performing game effects based on the player's volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the (sound output device 9) to a predetermined volume, which is set to a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in accordance with the reception of the first control information. Displaying a change image (screen during setting change), ending display of the setting change image upon reception of the second control information, and normally receiving the second control information while the setting change image is being displayed. If not, the display of the setting change image is continued even after the setting change state has ended, and the sound volume cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); With the start of the setting change state, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and with the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is sent to the production control means ), and the effect control means includes a light emitting unit ( light quantity setting means for setting the light quantity of the effect light for emitting the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device to a predetermined light quantity; display a setting change image (setting changing screen) on the display unit (first image display device 70) of, terminate the display of the setting change image in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and display the setting change image If the second control information is not normally received during display, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is terminated, and the light amount is set during the display of the setting change image. is impossible. By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); With the start of the setting change state, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and with the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is sent to the production control means ), and the effect control means includes a sound output unit for performing game effects based on the player's volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the (voice output device 9) to a predetermined volume and the light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player, the game is performed. a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for emitting the light emitting units (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the backlight of the image display device) for performing the effect to a predetermined light quantity; When the first control information is received, a setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70), and when the second control information is received, the setting change image is displayed. If the display is ended and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change image is continued to be displayed even if the setting change state is ended, and the setting change image is displayed. While the changed image is being displayed, it is impossible to set the volume and the amount of light. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect Effect control means (performance control board 130) for performing, and grant control means (payout control board 120 ), wherein the game control means includes setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (winning of game media to the starting port ) based on the establishment of the variable display means for executing the variable display of the pattern (special pattern), and the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, With the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and the third control information (variation start) is sent to the production control means with the start of the variable display of the symbol. command); specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal medium payouts) generated in a game to calculate specific information (normal base value); A specific information display means for displaying specific information on an information display section (information display device 113), and the effect control means controls a predetermined display section (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting changing screen), terminate display of the setting change image upon reception of the second control information, and display the predetermined display upon reception of the third control information. When the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state is terminated even if the setting change state is ended. The display of the changed image is continued, and the provision control means, when being controlled to the setting change state and during the display of the setting change image, puts a game medium ( game balls, medals) is won, the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state is over and the setting change image is being displayed, without performing the award control due to the winning. performs the grant control according to the winning, and the specific information calculating means is controlled to the setting change state and the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed; the above-mentioned special If the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed after the setting change state is finished without calculating the constant information, the specific information is calculated according to the winning, When the second control information is not normally received and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the effect control means displays the setting change image. After finishing, the variable display of the production pattern is started. In addition, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling game production based on control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means , The game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (winning of game media to the starting port). Based on the establishment, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the setting With the end of the change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and the third control information (variation start command) is sent to the production control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols. a specific information calculating means for calculating specific information (normal base value) by collecting game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal medium payouts) generated in the game, and said specific information and a specific information display means for displaying on the information display unit (information display device 113), and the effect control means is provided with a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receipt of the first control information display a setting change image (setting changing screen) on the display unit, terminate display of the setting change image upon reception of the second control information, and display the predetermined display unit upon reception of the third control information. If the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image after the variable display of the effect symbols (variation effect) is started, the setting change image is displayed even if the setting change state is terminated. , and the provision control means, when being controlled to the setting change state and during the display of the setting change image, the game medium (game ball , medals) is won, the award control is not performed due to the winning, and if the game medium wins in the winning area after the setting change state is over and the setting change image is being displayed, When the game medium wins in the prize area while the setting change image is being displayed while the setting change image is being displayed, the specific information calculation means performs the grant control according to the prize, If the specific information is not calculated due to the winning, and the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed after the setting change state is ended, the specific information is calculated according to the winning. Perform the calculation, the game control If the starting condition is met during the display of the setting change image after the end of the setting change state, the means starts the variable display of the symbols, and the effect control means controls the second control information. is not normally received, and the variable display of the pattern is started while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect Effect control means (performance control board 130) for performing, and grant control means (payout control board 120 ), wherein the game control means includes setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (winning of game media to the starting port ) based on the establishment of the variable display means for executing the variable display of the pattern (special pattern), and the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, With the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and the third control information (variation start) is sent to the production control means with the start of the variable display of the symbol. command); specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal medium payouts) generated in a game to calculate specific information (normal base value); A specific information display means for displaying specific information on an information display section (information display device 113), and the effect control means controls a predetermined display section (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting changing screen), terminate display of the setting change image upon reception of the second control information, and display the predetermined display upon reception of the third control information. When the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state is terminated even if the setting change state is ended. The display of the changed image is continued, and the provision control means, when being controlled to the setting change state and during the display of the setting change image, puts a game medium ( game balls, medals) is won, the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state is over and the setting change image is being displayed, without performing the award control due to the winning. performs the grant control according to the winning, and the specific information calculating means is controlled to the setting change state and the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed; the said winning If the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed after the setting change state is completed without collecting the game information, the game information is collected by the winning, When the second control information is not normally received and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the effect control means displays the setting change image. After finishing, the variable display of the production pattern is started. In addition, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling game production based on control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means , grant control means (payout control board 120) for performing grant control of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means, wherein the game control means, A setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a pattern (special pattern) based on establishment of a starting condition (winning of game media to a starting port). Transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the variable display means for executing variable display and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and controlling the effect with the end of the setting change state a transmission means for transmitting second control information (power-on designation command) to the means and transmitting third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols; Specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal medium payouts) to calculate specific information (normal base value); and a specific information display means for displaying a setting change image (screen during setting change) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. is displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and the variation display (variation presentation) of the performance pattern is performed in the predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the third control information. If the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change image is continued to be displayed even if the setting change state is over, and the addition control means When a game medium (game ball, medal) wins a prize in a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting change image is being displayed while being controlled to the setting change state, If the game medium wins in the prize area while the setting change image is being displayed after the setting change state is ended without performing the grant control due to winning, the grant control based on the winning is performed and The specific information calculating means collects the game information due to the winning when the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed while being controlled to the setting change state. first, the setting change state When the game medium wins in the winning area during the display of the setting change image after the end, the game information is collected by the winning, and the game control means controls the setting change state after the setting change state ends. and when the starting condition is satisfied during the display of the setting change image, the variable display of the symbols is started, the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change is performed. When the variable display of the pattern is started while the image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect Effect control means (performance control board 130) for performing, and grant control means (payout control board 120 ), wherein the game control means includes setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (winning of game media to the starting port ) based on the establishment of the variable display means for executing the variable display of the pattern (special pattern), and the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, With the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the production control means, and the third control information (variation start) is sent to the production control means with the start of the variable display of the symbol. command), and winning determination means for determining whether or not a game medium (game ball, medal) has won a prize in a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), The effect control means causes a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (screen during setting change) upon receipt of the first control information, and upon reception of the second control information to end the display of the setting change image, to start the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbols on the predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the third control information, and to start the variable effect during the display of the setting change image 2 When the control information is not normally received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is terminated, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. The execution of the winning determination is restricted, and the execution of the winning determination is controlled to be possible after the setting change state is ended, and the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed, when the third control information is normally received, the display of the setting change image is ended and the variable display of the effect symbols is started. In addition, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling game production based on control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means , grant control means (payout control board 120) for performing grant control of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means, wherein the game control means, A setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a pattern (special pattern) based on establishment of a starting condition (winning of game media to a starting port). Transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the variable display means for executing variable display and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and controlling the effect with the end of the setting change state Transmission means for transmitting second control information (power-on designation command) to the means, and transmitting third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols; winning determination means for determining whether or not a game medium (game ball, medal) has won a prize (various winning openings, various starting openings), wherein the effect control means receives the first control information. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) along with the above, the display of the setting change image is terminated upon receipt of the second control information, and the In the case where the variable display (variable effect) of the performance symbols is started on the predetermined display unit in accordance with the reception of the third control information, and the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image. , the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is terminated, and the game control means restricts the execution of the winning judgment when the setting change state is controlled, and the setting change is performed. After the end of the state, control is performed to enable execution of the winning determination, and when the start condition is met during the display of the setting change image after the end of the setting change state, the variable display of the symbols is started. When the second control information is not normally received and the variable display of the symbols is started, the effect control means maintains the display of the setting change image. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), the game control means is a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and starting Variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on establishment of a condition (winning of a game medium to a starting port); (setting change designation command) is transmitted, second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the effect is transmitted upon start of the variable display of the symbols. and transmission means for transmitting third control information (variation start command) to the control means, and the effect control means is based on the volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. , a volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the sound output unit (voice output device 9) for effecting the game to a predetermined volume, and a predetermined display in accordance with the reception of the first control information. display a setting change image (setting changing screen) on the unit (first image display device 70), terminate the display of the setting change image in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and receive the third control information. When the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state is changed. The setting change image continues to be displayed even after the setting change image is displayed, the volume setting is impossible during the display of the setting change image, the second control information is not normally received, and the setting change is performed. When the third control information is normally received while the image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended, the variable display of the performance symbols is started, and the variable display of the performance symbols is started. After that, a state is set in which the volume can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As the eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), the game control means is a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and starting Variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on establishment of a condition (winning of a game medium to a starting port); (setting change designation command) is transmitted, second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the effect is transmitted upon start of the variable display of the symbols. and transmission means for transmitting third control information (variation start command) to the control means, the effect control means, based on the light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. , light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for emitting the light emitting unit (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the backlight of the image display device) for performing the game effect to a predetermined light amount, When the first control information is received, a setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70), and when the second control information is received, the setting change image is displayed. is terminated, and upon receipt of the third control information, the predetermined display unit starts variable display of performance symbols (variation performance), and the second control information is displayed normally during display of the setting change image. If the setting change image is not received immediately, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is terminated, and the light amount cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. 2 When the control information is not normally received and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated and the effect pattern is changed. The display is started, and after the variable display of the production pattern is started, the light quantity can be set. By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control the game effect and a production control means (production control board 130), the game control means is a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and starting Variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on establishment of a condition (winning of a game medium to a starting port); (setting change designation command) is transmitted, second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the effect is transmitted upon start of the variable display of the symbols. and transmission means for transmitting third control information (variation start command) to the control means, and the effect control means is based on the volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. , volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the sound output unit (audio output device 9) for effecting the game to a predetermined volume; operation), the amount of the effect light for emitting the light emitting units (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the backlight of the image display device) for effecting the game is reduced to a predetermined light quantity. a setting change image (screen during setting change) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, and the second control is performed. When the information is received, the display of the setting change image is terminated, and when the third control information is received, the predetermined display unit starts the variable display of the effect symbols (variable effect), and the setting change image is displayed. If the second control information is not normally received during display, the setting change image continues to be displayed even if the setting change state is terminated, and the volume and the When the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the second control information is not normally received because the light amount cannot be set. The display of the changed image is ended, the variable display of the performance symbols is started, and after the variable display of the performance symbols is started, the sound volume and the light amount can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and game benefits (prize the game control means includes a first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing storage information associated with the progress control; , setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); a first initialization means for initializing stored information (information other than the set value area of the game RWM area); initialization information transmission means for transmitting information (power-on designation command); a second initialization means for initializing predetermined storage information (information other than the firing permission flag area in the RWM area) stored in the second information storage means when receiving the information. Further, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and grant control for controlling the granting of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on grant information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control board 120), and the game control means includes first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing storage information associated with the progress control, and any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set, and predetermined storage information stored in the first information storage means (other than the setting value area of the game RWM area) when controlling to the setting change state information), and initialization for transmitting initialization information (power-on designation command) to the imparting control means along with initialization of predetermined stored information in the first information storage means and information transmission means, wherein the grant control means includes a second information storage means (payout RAM 120c) for storing storage information associated with the grant control, and when the initialization information is received, the second information storage means and second initialization means for initializing stored predetermined storage information (information other than the firing permission flag area in the RWM area). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game is provided, and the game control means stores information stored according to the progress control. means (main RAM 110c), setting change means for controlling a setting change state in which any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) can be set, and stored in the information storage means when the setting change state ends initialization means for initializing predetermined stored information (information other than the set value area of the game RWM area), wherein the information storage means initializes the stored information by the initialization means; 1 storage area (an area other than the set value area of the game RWM area) and a second storage area (an information area of the information RWM area) whose stored information is not initialized by the initialization means. there is In addition, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means includes information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing storage information associated with the progress control, 1 to 4), and predetermined storage information stored in the information storage means when controlling to the setting change state (game RWM area and an initialization means for initializing information other than the setting value area), and the information storage means includes a first storage area (the setting value area of the game RWM area) in which the stored information is initialized by the initialization means. and a second storage area (an information area of the information RWM area) in which stored information is not initialized by the initialization means. By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4) setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to , and game information (number of outs during normal, number of payouts during normal) generated in a game in a predetermined game section are collected to calculate specific information (normal base value) Information calculation means and information display means for displaying the specific information on an information display section (information display device 113) are provided, and the information calculation means calculates a calculates the specific information based on the game information of the game played before the change and the game information of the game played after the change. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means has a plurality of set values (1 to 4) setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to , and game information (number of outs during normal, number of payouts during normal) generated in a game in a predetermined game section are collected to calculate specific information (normal base value) Information calculation means, and information display means for displaying the specific information on an information display unit, wherein the information calculation means calculates information that does not change due to changes in the set values (the number of outs during normal operation, the number of payouts during normal operation, number) is collected as the game information. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality detection means for detecting that an abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) has occurred; and transmitting means for transmitting control information (setting change designation command) and transmitting second control information (error designation command) in accordance with the detection of the predetermined abnormality, wherein the effect control means is the first control When the information is received, a setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70), and when the second control information is received, the predetermined display unit is notified of the abnormality. Images (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, and the abnormal notification image is not displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. . By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality determination means for determining the occurrence of an abnormality (unauthorized winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and the production control means with the start of the setting change state First control information (setting change designation command), and transmitting means for transmitting second control information (error designation command) with the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, and the effect control means transmits the first control information A setting change image (screen during setting change) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception, and an abnormality notification image ( illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) is displayed, and the game control means does not determine the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state. It's becoming In addition, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling game production based on control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means , The game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined abnormality (unauthorized winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error, etc.) and the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the predetermined and transmission means for transmitting second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of an abnormality in the above, and the effect control means transmits a predetermined display section (first image The display device 70) displays a setting change image (screen during setting change), and upon receipt of the second control information, an abnormality notification image (unauthorized winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image) is displayed on the predetermined display unit. image, radio wave error image, door open error image, etc.), the game control means is configured to be able to determine the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state, and the effect control means displays the setting change image is displayed, the setting change image is preferentially displayed when the second control information is received. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality detection means for detecting that an abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) has occurred; Control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted, second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon termination of the setting change state, and second control information is transmitted upon detection of the predetermined abnormality. 3 and transmission means for transmitting control information (error designation command), and the effect control means displays a setting change image on a predetermined display section (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. (screen during setting change) is displayed, display of the setting change image is terminated upon reception of the second control information, and an abnormality notification image ( image of an illegal winning error, an abnormal winning error image, a magnetic error image, a radio wave error image, a door opening error image, etc.) is displayed, and the abnormal notification image cannot be displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. After the display of the modified image is completed, the abnormality notification image can be displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a power supply Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power restoration) based on the input, and transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, With the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means, and the third control information (power restoration designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the initial process. ), and the effect control means transmits a setting change image (setting changing screen) to a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. display a plurality of performance symbols on the predetermined display unit upon receipt of the second control information; and display a plurality of performance symbols on the predetermined display unit upon reception of the third control information. , the plurality of performance symbols displayed upon receipt of the second control information and the plurality of performance symbols displayed upon receipt of the third control information are the same performance symbols (initial performance symbol "135"); ). By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. and a production control means (production control board 130), wherein the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a power supply Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power restoration) based on the input, and transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, With the end of the setting change state, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means, and the third control information (power restoration designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the initial process. ), and the effect control means transmits a setting change image (setting changing screen) to a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. display a plurality of performance symbols on the predetermined display unit upon receipt of the second control information; and display a plurality of performance symbols on the predetermined display unit upon reception of the third control information. and displaying one of a plurality of performance modes (performance modes A to G) when the plurality of performance symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit, and receiving the second control information. The production mode displayed along with the reception of the third control information is the same production mode (production mode A). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

A twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problems includes setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), a starting condition (a game medium to a starting port Based on the establishment of the winning), the first special game (small winning game) that is advantageous to the player or the second special game (big winning game) that is more advantageous than the first special game is executed. means, variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and when it is determined that the first special game is to be performed, the type of the first special game is determined. and second determining means for determining the type of the second special game when it is determined that the second special game is to be executed, and the determining means is set by the setting changing means. Whether or not the second special game is to be executed is determined (so that the odds of winning the jackpot are different) with the probability according to the set value, and the probability is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting change means. Then, it is determined whether or not the first special game is to be executed (so that the probability of winning a small hit is the same), and the first determination means is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting change means , the type of the first special game is determined. By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

A thirtieth configuration for solving the above problems includes setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), a starting condition (a game medium to a starting port Based on the establishment of a prize), a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result of the determination means, a variable display of symbols (special symbols) and a determining means for determining the type of the special game when it is determined that the special game is to be performed, the determining means depending on the setting value set by the setting changing means. It is determined whether or not the special game is to be executed (so that the probability of winning a jackpot is different) with the probability that the special game is executed. Identical regardless of value. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes according to the type of the jackpot game (jackpot special symbol) and the game state at the time of the jackpot. A game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability short-time gaming state after the end, and to shift to a low-probability short-time gaming state or a low-probability short-time gaming state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. In this case, regardless of the set value, the number of times of the variable display executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state may be the same, or the continuation rate of the high-probability time-saving gaming state is the same. You may set the number of times of display.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to a game state.

In addition, when the game ball passes through a specific area provided inside the big winning opening in a specific round game of the jackpot game, the game ball passes through the specific area after the jackpot game is completed, shifting to a high-probability short-time game state. If not, the game machine may shift to a low-probability short-working-time game state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it is also possible to adopt a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line by a game using medals (game media) as game value (fulfilling condition). Also, it can be used for a reel-type game machine (so-called slot machine) capable of awarding a predetermined amount of prize medals to a player. Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 first big winning port 53 second big winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

Equipped with game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
setting change means for controlling a setting change state in which a setting value that determines the probability of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player can be set;
information calculation means for collecting game information generated in a game in a predetermined game section and calculating specific information;
information display means for displaying the specific information and the predetermined identification information side by side on the information display unit;
The game information includes the number of game media used in the game,
The information calculation means is
without calculating the specific information during the setting change state;
The information display means is
When the display switching time elapses after displaying the specific information in the current game section and the identification information indicating the current game section, the specific information in the past game section and the identification information indicating the past game section are changed. display and
When displaying the specific information in the current game section, before the number of game media used in the game in the current game section reaches a predetermined number, the specific information in the current game section is displayed in a second display mode. In addition, the identification information indicating the current game section is displayed in the first display mode, and after reaching the predetermined number, the specific information in the current game section and the identification information indicating the current game section are displayed as the Display in the second display mode,
When the specific information in the current game section is displayed in the second display mode and the identification information indicating the current game section is displayed in the first display mode, it is used in the current game section. When the number of game media reaches a predetermined number ,
Until the display switching time elapses, the specific information in the current game section is displayed in the second display mode, and the identification information indicating the current game section is displayed in the first display mode, and then A gaming machine characterized by displaying the specific information in the current game section and the identification information indicating the current game section in the second display mode at the timing of displaying the specific information in the current game section. .

Images